This manual provides instructions for setting up and using communication functions on FANUC CNC such as the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i. It includes specifications for the embedded Ethernet and optional board, as well as software and hardware options. The document covers data server functions, FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, DNS/DHCP client functions, machine remote diagnosis functions, unsolicited messaging functions, and FTP file transfer functions. It provides details on setting up and operating each of these functions, as well as related NC parameters and examples of common configurations. Safety precautions are also outlined.

1. FANUC Series 30+-MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 31+-MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 32+-MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 35+-MODEL B
Fast Ethernet
Fast Data Server
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64014EN/04

2. • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual contain software controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”.
For this reason, the export of these products is subject to an export license based on that
law.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.

3. B-64014EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units, to ensure safe operation of
machines fitted with FANUC CNC units. Read this section carefully before attempting to use any function
described in this manual.
Users should also read the relevant descriptions in the User’s Manual of the CNC to become fully familiar
with the functions to be used.
Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved
procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved
procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the
machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or
injury to the user.
s-1

4. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64014EN/04
WARNING
2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the programmed
value, compensation value, current position, and external signal settings. Also,
never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The
appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a
machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to
change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece
and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI
panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
2 The operator's manual for Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server describes all the basic
functions of the CNC, including the optional functions. The selected optional
functions vary with the machine. Some functions described in this manual may
not, therefore, be supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications
before using Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.
s-2

5. B-64014EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
3 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine
tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
For example:
• On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool change unit to
operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of
the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator.
• Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the
spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that
you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function.
NOTE
Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in nonvolatile memory
in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off
operation. However, the contents of memory may be erased by mistake, or
important data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased upon recovering
from a failure.
To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises,
always make a backup of the data in advance.
s-3

7. B-64014EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-1
I. GENERAL
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3
1.1 ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 3
1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS................................................................................. 3
1.3 RELATED MANUALS.................................................................................... 4
II. SPECIFICATION
1 PREFACE................................................................................................ 7
1.1 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet
AND OPTIONAL BOARD .............................................................................. 7
2 ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ......................................... 9
2.1 HARDWARE OPTIONS................................................................................. 9
2.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ................................................................................. 9
2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS ...................................................................... 9
2.4 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 10
2.5 SCREEN LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 12
3 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 13
3.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 13
3.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management ...................................................................14
3.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server................................14
3.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files ....................................................................................15
3.2 DATA SERVER MODES ............................................................................. 15
3.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................................................. 17
3.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER ...................................................... 20
3.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 20
3.6 LIST FILE FORMAT .................................................................................... 22
3.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION ..................................................... 24
4 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS........................................................... 25
5 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 26
6 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................... 27
7 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ............................................ 28
8 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ....................................................... 30
c-1

8. TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/04
III. SETTING
1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ................................... 33
1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS............... 33
2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS....................................... 36
2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN ............................. 36
2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 43
2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ..................... 47
3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .................................. 48
3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN ......................... 48
3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 50
3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.................. 51
4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION................................................ 52
4.1 SETTING OF DNS....................................................................................... 52
4.2 SETTING OF DHCP .................................................................................... 53
4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 55
4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.......................................................... 55
4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...................................................55
4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server ...............56
4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function ..................................57
5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......... 60
5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN. 60
5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 64
5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
FROM THE PMC ......................................................................................... 65
5.3.1 Signals ....................................................................................................................65
5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts..............................................................................................67
5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted................................... 67
5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected.................................... 68
5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated .................................... 68
5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 69
6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................. 70
6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION .......................... 70
6.1.1 Selection of Mode ..................................................................................................73
6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen .............................................................................74
6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer...................................................................78
6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION..................... 78
6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method) ...................79
6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) ..................................81
6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)................................82
6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 84
7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................... 86
7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ..................................... 86
7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 89
c-2

9. B-64014EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING 91
IV. OPERATION
1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS................................. 95
1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN...................... 95
1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN ............................ 96
1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................100
1.2.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................106
1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.........................................................107
1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN ............... 108
1.3.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................110
1.3.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................113
1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation ............................................................................114
1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL........................................................ 115
1.5 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 116
1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 116
1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 117
1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 118
2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .. 119
2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............... 119
2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..........................................................................120
2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis ................................................................................................120
2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status ............................................................................................... 120
2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages................................................................... 121
2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis...........................................................................122
3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION....................... 123
3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN.................... 124
3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN.............. 125
3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................126
3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 129
3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 129
V. CONNECTION
1 SETTING ............................................................................................. 133
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 133
1.1.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................133
1.1.2 Installation ............................................................................................................133
1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 133
1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 134
1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 135
1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 135
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 137
1.2.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................137
1.2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................138
1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 138
1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 139
1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 140
1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 140
c-3

10. TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/04
2 CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................... 142
2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet ...................................................................... 142
2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE ....................................................... 144
2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ............................................... 144
2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION ................................................ 145
2.4.1 Cable Connection .................................................................................................145
2.4.2 Cable Materials.....................................................................................................145
2.4.3 Connector Specification .......................................................................................147
2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES.......................................... 148
2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines........................................................................................148
2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...........................................................................148
2.5.3 Grounding the Network........................................................................................150
2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................................................... 152
VI. MAINTENANCE
1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.................................. 157
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 157
1.1.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................157
1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................158
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 160
1.2.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................160
1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................161
2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION................................... 164
2.1 Ethernet LOG ............................................................................................ 164
2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION.......................................... 169
2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION........................................... 171
2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION.................................. 172
2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 173
2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 176
2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION........................... 177
APPENDIX
A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 181
A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB.......................................... 181
A.2 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK ....................................... 181
A.3 CHECKING SETTINGS............................................................................. 182
A.4 CHECKING COMMUNICATION................................................................ 182
B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP ................................................. 185
B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 185
B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 196
B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET
INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 216
c-4

11. B-64014EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET
INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 233
C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP ........................................... 254
C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server. 255
C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ... 261
D FTP CLIENT OPERATION.................................................................. 266
D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND.............................................. 266
D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer........................................................... 268
D.2.1 Displaying the File List ........................................................................................268
D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer ..........................................................................281
D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ........ 283
c-5

13. I. GENERAL

15. B-64014EN/04 GENERAL 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This part explains the organization of this manual.
1.1 ORGANIZATION
This manual consists of the following parts:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the precautions to be observed when reading this manual.
I. GENERAL
This part describes the chapter organization, applicable models, and related manuals.
II. SPECIFICATION
This part describes the specifications of the functions that operate on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server.
III. SETTING
This part describes the method of setting.
IV. OPERATION
This part describes the method of operating the Data Server functions, machine remote diagnosis
functions, and FTP file transfer function.
V. CONNECTION
This part describes the method of connection and provides notes.
VI. MAINTENANCE
This part provides an Ethernet board drawing number and describes the meanings of LED
indications.
APPENDIX
These appendixes describe additional information such as that related to troubleshooting, the
operation of the FTP client, and how to set up the FTP server.
1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS
This Operator's Manual covers the following models.
The abbreviations in the following table are sometimes used in text descriptions.
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A Series 30i -A
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A
Series 31i -A Series 30i/31i/32i -A
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 Series
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Series 32i -A 30i/31i/32i -A/B
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Series 30i -B or
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B Series Series
Series 31i -B Series 30i/31i/32i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 30i/31i/32i -B
30i/31i/32i /35i -B
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Series 32i -B
FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B Series 35i -B Series 35i -B
-3-

16. 1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64014EN/04
1.3 RELATED MANUALS
The table below lists manuals related to this manual.
Refer to these manuals when you use this manual. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Specification
Manual name
number
Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-A
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63944EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-B
DESCRIPTIONS B-64482EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64483EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64483EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64484EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64484EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64484EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64485EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64490EN
Related to Series 35i-B
DESCRIPTIONS B-64522EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64523EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64523EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64524EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64525EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64530EN
PMC
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN *
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64163EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Machine Remote Diagnosis
Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63734EN
-4-

17. II. SPECIFICATION

19. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 1.PREFACE
1 PREFACE
In this manual, a board that has an ATA Flash card or a Compact Flash Card (collectively called a
memory card hereinafter) mounted to enable the use of the Data Server functions is referred to as a "Fast
Data Server" (or simply as a "Data Server"). On the other hand, a board that does not have a memory card
mounted is referred to as a "Fast Ethernet".
Board name Usable function
- Data Server functions
- FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
Fast Data Server - CNC screen display functions
(or simply referred to as "Data Server") - Machine remote diagnosis functions
- Unsolicited messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet)
- FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
- CNC screen display functions
- Machine remote diagnosis functions
Fast Ethernet
- Unsolicited messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet)
- FTP file transfer function
NOTE
1 To use the Data Server functions, the Data Server function option is required.
To use the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, CNC screen display functions, machine
remote diagnosis functions, unsolicited messaging function, and FTP file transfer
function, the Ethernet function option is required.
To use the CNC screen display functions, the CNC screen display function
option is additionally required.
2 The LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B has a Fast Ethernet circuit
(Multi-function Ethernet) mounted on its main board. The circuit can be used as
hardware for Fast Ethernet. For details, see Section 2.1, “HARDWARE
OPTIONS” below.
3 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B.
1.1 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD
There are the following differences in Ethernet function between the embedded Ethernet and optional
board.
Embedded Ethernet Optional board
FOCAS2/Ethernet functions Note 1 Possible Possible
DNC operation Impossible Possible
FTP file transfer function Possible Possible
Data Server functions Note 2 Impossible Possible
Machine remote diagnosis functions Impossible Possible
Unsolicited messaging function Note 3 Possible Possible
DNS/DHCP client functions Possible Possible
Ethernet display function Possible Impossible
-7-

20. 1.PREFACE SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
NOTE
1 The number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients that can be connected concurrently
with the embedded Ethernet is smaller than that with the optional board.
Embedded Ethernet Optional board
Number of clients that can be connected concurrently Up to 5 Up to 20
Number of PCs that can be connected concurrently 1 (recommended)） Up to 20
2 The Data Server functions cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet in the
Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
For details of Multi-function Ethernet, see Section 2.1, “HARDWARE OPTIONS”
below.
3 To use the unsolicited messaging function on the embedded Ethernet in the
Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the Enhanced Embedded Ethernet function (R952) option
is required.
4 Communication using embedded Ethernet is processed by the CPU in the CNC,
which means that the CNC operation status may affect the communication
performance of the embedded Ethernet and communication using embedded
Ethernet may also affect CNC processing.
The embedded Ethernet function operates with priority lower than that given to
automatic or manual operation performed for each axis. Consequently, the
communication rate may be slower during automatic operation or operation with
many controlled axes.
Meanwhile, the embedded Ethernet function operates with priority higher than
that given to the CNC screen display processing, C Language Executor (other
than high-level tasks), and other processing. Consequently, communication
using embedded Ethernet may reduce the performance of the processing.
5 Carefully connect embedded Ethernet to an intracompany network handling
much broadcast data because broadcast data processing takes time, which may
affect the performance of the CNC screen display processing and others.
-8-

21. 2.ABOUT USE WITH Series
B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
2 ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
The hardware of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is different from one of Series 30i/31i/32i-A.
In this section, the difference of the specification is described.
2.1 HARDWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following hardware is prepared for Fast Ethernet.
Kind of hardware Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series
Multi-function Ethernet
30i/31i/32i/35i-B (Connector name: CD38B)
Fast Ethernet board Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)
The above hardware can be used as hardware for the FL-net according to the setting of the NC parameters
(No.970-972).
The information when the hardware is used as hardware for Fast Ethernet is described in this manual.
Refer to “FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL” (B-64163EN) regarding the FL-net function.
2.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following software functions can be used by the hardware options shown
in section 2.1.
Function name Drawing Description
Ethernet function A02B-xxxx-S707 Ethernet function (ex. FOCAS2/Ethernet) can be used.
Data Server function A02B-xxxx-S737 Data Server function can be used. (NOTE1)
FL-net function A02B-xxxx-J692 FL-net function can be used.
FL-net PORT2 function A02B-xxxx-R964 Two FL-net functions can be used simultaneously.
NOTE
1 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet.
The Data Server function cannot be used on the Series 35i-B.
2 In the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the special software and software options are
necessary to use the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. But, in the Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B, it is possible to use FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function by only
Ethernet function and FL-net function.
Please refer to “2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS” about the setting for
FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.
2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function
0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function
0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] -1 to 6
Hardware that operates each function is selected. Please refer to the next section, too.
-9-

22. 2. ABOUT USE WITH Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
Value Hardware
-1 Not used
0 Unsetting (NOTE1)
1 Multi-function Ethernet (NOTE2)
2 (reserved)
3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1
4 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2
5 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3
6 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
NOTE
1 When one hardware option is mounted and the software option is
uniquely decided, the function can run even if NC parameters
No.970-972 are set to 0.
2 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function
Ethernet. If using the Data Server function, don’t set 1 to NC
parameter No.970.
3 When the Ethernet function and the FL-net function are available,
these functions can operate on the same hardware by specifying
the same hardware on the NC parameters No.970 and 971 as the
FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.
And, each function can operate on the different hardware by
specifying the different hardware.
Please refer to “FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL”
(B-64163EN) about FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.
4 When the Ethernet function and the Data Server function are
available, these functions must operate on the same hardware
according to the NC parameter No.970.
These functions cannot operate on the different hardware.
5 When the Ethernet function, the Data Server function, and the
FL-net function are available, the NC parameters No.970 and 971
have to set the different hardware. In this case, the Ethernet
function and the FL-net function cannot operate on the same
hardware.
2.4 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, when using the Ethernet function, Data Server function, and FL-net function,
please select hardware and software basically according to the following procedure.
- 10 -

23. 2.ABOUT USE WITH Series
B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Do you use no Do you use no Do you use no
Data Server Ethernet function? FL-net function?
function?
No Ethe rnets
yes NOTE1) yes yes
no no Do you use no
Do you use Do you use two FL-net functions
FL-net function? FL-net function? at the same time?
One Ethe rnet
yes yes case7 yes
Two Ethernets
Do you use no Do you use no Do you use yes case4
two FL-net functions two FL-net functions FL-net/Ethe rnet
at the same time? at the same time? coexisting
function?
yes yes no One Ethe rnet
case8
One Ethe rnet
no Do you use case6
FL-net/Ethe rnet
coexisting
function?
Three Ethernets yes
case1
Two Ethernets
case3
One Ethe rnet Two Ethernets
case5 case2
LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Required hardware Required software option NC parameters
Multi-function Ethernet J692 No.970 = 3
case 1 Three Ethernets Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.971 = 1
Fast Ethernet board (slot2) R964 No.972 = 4
Multi-function Ethernet J692 No.970 = 3
case 2 Two Ethernets
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.971 = 1
No.970 = 1
Multi-function Ethernet S707 + J692
case 3 Two Ethernets No.971 = 1
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) R964
No.972 = 3
Multi-function Ethernet J692 No.971 = 1
case 4 Two Ethernets
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) R964 No.972 = 3
case 5 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.970 = 3
No.970 = 1
case 6 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet S707 + J692
No.971 = 1
case 7 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet S707 No.970 = 1
case 8 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet J692 No.971 = 1
Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Required hardware Required software option NC parameters
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) J692 No.970 = 3
case 1
Three Ethernets Fast Ethernet board (slot2) S737 (+S707) No.971 = 4
(NOTE2)
Fast Ethernet board (slot3) R964 No.972 = 5
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) J692 No.970 = 3
case 2 Two Ethernets
Fast Ethernet board (slot2) S737 (+S707) No.971 = 4
No.970 = 3
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S707 + J692
case 3 Two Ethernets No.971 = 3
Fast Ethernet board (slot2) R964
No.972 = 4
- 11 -

24. 2. ABOUT USE WITH Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
Required hardware Required software option NC parameters
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) J692 No.971 = 3
case 4 Two Ethernets
Fast Ethernet board (slot2) R964 No.972 = 4
case 5 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.970 = 3
No.970 = 3
case 6 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S707 + J692
No.971 = 3
case 7 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S707 No.970 = 3
case 8 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) J692 No.971 = 3
NOTE
1 When the Data Server function is selected, whether the Ethernet function is
selected does not affect the subsequent selection procedure because the
Ethernet and Data Server functions always operate on the same hardware.
2 It is not selectable because only two option boards can be mounted in the
stand-alone type of Series 35i-B.
2.5 SCREEN LAYOUT
In this manual, each screen has described the example of the screen of Series 30i/31i/32i-A. A basic
content is the same though a detailed layout might be different.
The hardware can be confirmed in title part of each screen of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.
The kind of the hardware is shown on the title bar as the above example like [MULTI –FUNC ETHER].
Title Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series
[MUTI-FUNC ETHER]
30i/31i/32i/35i-B
[BOARD(SLOT1)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 1
[BOARD(SLOT2)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 2
[BOARD(SLOT3)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 3
[BOARD(SLOT4)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
- 12 -

25. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
3 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
The Data Server functions use a memory card built into a board for storing files and can transfer files and
perform DNC operation using FTP.
A Data Server can operate on both FTP client and FTP server.
When you use a Data Server to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP client and communicates
with the FTP server on the host computer.
When you use the host computer to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP server and
communicates with the FTP client on the host computer.
NOTE
1 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B.
2 Before communicating with the host computer using the Data Server functions,
completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including
communication with the personal computer because the personal computer
environment may affect communication operation.
3 When the host computer operates as an FTP server, FTP server software must
be run on the host computer. When the host computer operates as an FTP
client, FTP client software must be run on the host computer.
3.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT
With the Data Server functions, you can format the built-in memory card in the CNC file management
mode to manage NC programs.
CNC file management
For NC programs managed in the CNC file management mode, memory operation such as custom macro
commands and M98-based subprogram calling are available. Operate the NC programs using the
PROGRAM FOLDER screen in the same way as for NC programs in the CNC memory.
As a CNC external input/output device, DNC operation and M198-based subprogram calling are available.
In this case, operate NC programs using the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.
Edit operation
PROGRAM FOLDER screen
CNC file management Memory operation
DATA SERVER FILE LIST
(DNC operation is also available.)
screen
File transfer operation
NOTE
1 The Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B allows editing and memory
operation of NC programs stored on the memory card, so the method of
managing files on the memory card differs from the file management method of
Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on. Note that, therefore, the memory
card of the 30i-A is not compatible with the memory cards of Data Servers for
the Series 16i-B and so on.
- 13 -

26. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
NOTE
2 For operation and details of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, refer to Chapter,
"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
Lathe System/Machining Center System)."
3 For operation and details of the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, refer to
Chapter 1, "OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS," in Part IV,
"OPERATION."
3.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management
You can assign a file name to a file managed in the CNC file management mode in the same way as for
CNC memory.
• Up to 32 characters
• Alphabetic characters (in upper and lower cases), numeric characters, and four symbols (+, -, _,
and .)
NOTE
1 File names are case-sensitive.
2 Any file name or folder name cannot begin with a period (.).
3 It is impossible to assign the same name to a file and a folder.
File names and program numbers
When a file name assigned to a file consists of uppercase O and a numeric value, the file name is treated
as a program number.
Values ranging from 1 to 9999 can be used (values ranging from 1 to 99999999 can be used according to
the parameter setting).
A value beyond this range cannot be used for a file name in the program number format.
Example)
File names that can be used as program numbers
“O0123” Program number 123
“O0001” Program number 1
“O3000” Program number 3000
“O9999” Program number 9999
File names that cannot be used as program numbers
“ABC” (Does not have the format "O plus a numeric value")
“o123” (Does not begin with uppercase letter "O")
“O123.4” (Uses a character other than numeric characters)
NOTE
When files on a Data Server are managed by program number, their program
numbers always consist of "O" plus a 4-digit number ("O" plus a 8-digit number).
So, even if there are files managed with different file names such as "O1" and
"O01" on a personal computer, their program numbers are regarded as the
same when these files are transferred to the Data Server.
3.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server
In the initial status, the maximum number of files which can be registered on a memory card on a Data
Server is 2047 and the maximum file size is 512 MB. Each folder is counted as one file.
The maximum number of files and the maximum file size can be changed using NC parameter No. 930.
- 14 -

27. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
3.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files
You can store the following two types of files on a memory card on a Data Server: text files and binary
files.
For a text file, memory operation and edit operation as well as DNC operation can be performed by
selecting it as a main program.
For binary files, only DNC operation is available, but binary input operation in the high-speed remote
buffer A format is available.
If NC data other than an NC program is not handled as a binary file, it may not be able to be input or
output correctly. NC data output and stored on a memory card on a Data Server from the CNC is
automatically handled as a binary file. A file to be transferred from a personal computer to a memory card
on a Data Server must be specified explicitly as a binary file.
More specifically, for GET operation on a Data Server operation screen, you can use soft key [GET] or
[BGET] to specify whether to handle the file as a text file or a binary file.
When the Data Server is used as an FTP server, you can execute an ASCII (text file) command or a BIN
(binary file) command on your personal computer (FTP client) to specify whether to handle the file as a
text file or a binary file.
NOTE
1 An NC program stored as a text file is converted to an editable file format so that
the file can be edited on the CNC. For this reason, when a text file is read from
the host computer to the memory card on the Data Server, then the file is
transferred to the host computer, binary compatibility can no longer be
maintained.
2 The file name of a text file and the O number or arbitrary file name in the
program are always the same. See Section 3.5, “NC PROGRAM FORMAT” for
details
3.2 DATA SERVER MODES
Each Data Server mode determines the input or output destination when a Data Server is operated as a
CNC external input/output device. You can select one of the following three modes.
NOTE
Data Server modes are valid only when the Data Server is operated as an
external storage device of the CNC. In case of main program operation for
editing and a memory operation and an M98-based subprogram call, programs
on the memory card of the Data Server are selected regardless of the Data
Server mode.
Storage mode
The memory card built into the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device.
For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC
program is called from the memory card built into the Data Server.
When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the memory
card built into the Data Server.
Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program
is written on the memory card built into the Data Server.
- 15 -

28. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
Input
CNC memory
Data Server Output
Memory card
DNC operation
FTP mode
The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device.
For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC
program is called from the host computer.
When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the host
computer connected to the Data Server.
Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program
is directly written on the host computer.
Data Server
Input
CNC memory
Host computer
Output
DNC operation
CAUTION
1 In the FTP mode, an NC program is transferred from the host computer to the
CNC. For this reason, if the line is disconnected during communication for some
reason such as noise on the network, the disconnection directly affects the CNC
operation as compared with the storage mode. Before DNC operation in the FTP
mode, surely take measures to prevent noise and make sure that good
communication conditions are present.
2 When feed hold is performed during DNC operation in the FTP mode,
communication with the host computer may be stopped. In this case, the host
computer may disconnect the communication. Perform feed hold during a trial
run and completely confirm that the communication with the host computer is not
disconnected.
Buffer mode
The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input device.
In the buffer mode unlike the FTP mode, however, areas on the memory card built into the Data Server
are used as intermediate buffers. For details of the buffer mode, see Section 2.3, "DETAILS OF THE
BUFFER MODE," which is the following section.
As the external output device, the memory card built into the Data Server is selected. When NC program
output operation is performed, the operation equivalent to that in the storage mode is performed.
- 16 -

29. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
Data Server Output
Memory card CNC memory
Input
Intermediate
Host computer buffers
DNC operation
NOTE
1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function
option (J728) is required.
2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.
3.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE
In the buffer mode, two areas (areas A and B) are prepared on the memory card. While the NC program
data stored in one area is being supplied to the CNC, the subsequent NC program data is read in the other
area from the host computer using FTP transfer. When all data in the former area has been supplied to the
CNC, the data in the latter area is supplied to the CNC. In the former area, which becomes empty, the
subsequent NC program data is read from the host computer using FTP transfer.
Repeating this operation enables an NC program larger than the capacity of the memory card to be
handled. To use the buffer mode, however, the original NC program must be divided into some files on
the host computer in advance.
The size of a divided file must be smaller than half the remaining capacity of the memory card. If the size
of a divided file is too large (for example, 100 MB or more), it takes much time to read the first file from
the host computer and it also takes time until operation starts.
Using the buffer mode
In the buffer mode, a file (such as Oxxxx) called by DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is
a file list. The file list contains the names of files to be called in the order in which they are to be called.
In the buffer mode, the Data Server sequentially calls the files specified in the file list from the host
computer and supplies data to the CNC.
CNC Data Server Host computer
Program Hard disk
call get (FTP)
Oxxxx Memory card Oxxxx
file1 Contents
Area A file2 of Oxxxx
file3 file1
file1 Area B file4
file2 file2
file5 file3
file3
file4 file4
file5 file5
- 17 -

30. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
Files (file1 to file5) specified in the file list on the host computer are stored on the memory card built into
the Data Server using FTP transfer and supplied to the CNC. In the buffer mode, after the CNC issues a
request to read an NC program to the Data Server, the specified file list is read from the host computer.
When the first file has been read, the Data Server starts supplying data to the CNC. For this reason, it
takes time from when the CNC issues a request to read a program to when the Data Server starts
supplying data.
While the Data Server is supplying the data in one area to the CNC, it stores data into the other area using
FTP transfer. For this reason, divide the original program data so that two consecutive files can be
contained on the memory card built into the Data Server.
Although the data in one area has been supplied to the CNC, FTP transfer may not terminate for the other
area. In this case, program calling terminates abnormally because the subsequent data cannot be supplied.
You can use a parameter not to cause the abnormal termination.
In the file list, you can specify any file name allowed by the host computer that consists of up to 255
single-byte alphanumeric characters. Be sure to specify at least one LF (0A in hexadecimal) or CR (0D in
hexadecimal) following each file name in the file list to delimit the file names.
NOTE
In the buffer mode, you can also register a new file on the memory card built into
the Data Server by the "NC program GET" or "NC program output" operation.
By this operation, however, the remaining capacity of the memory card built into
the Data Server that is required for operation in the buffer mode may be
exhausted, resulting in an error in DNC operation in the buffer mode.
For this reason, during DNC operation in the buffer mode, do not register any
new file on the memory card built into the Data Server.
Dividing an NC program into files
To perform operation in the buffer mode, divide an original NC program into several files on the host
computer and create a file list indicating the order in which the divided files are to be transferred in
advance.
- 18 -

31. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
Example)
Dividing an NC program into three files
% %
O1234(SAMPLE); O1234(SAMPLE);
: :
: :
Dividing the
: :
program into
X1.Y1.Z1.; three files X1.Y1.Z1.; file1
X2.Y2.Z2.;
: X2.Y2.Z2.;
: :
: :
X3.Y3.Z3.; :
X4.Y4.Z4.; X3.Y3.Z3.; file2
:
: X4.Y4.Z4.;
: :
M30; :
% :
M30;
% file3
file1
file2
file3 O1234
As shown above, divide an original NC file into three files, file1, file2, and file3. Specify the divided file
names in the file list (file name: O1234).
CAUTION
In the above example, the NC program is divided into files so that any block is
not divided. You can divide a program at a point in a block. When dividing a
program at a point in a block, be careful so that any unnecessary character is
not inserted at the end of each file.
If an unnecessary character is inserted at the end of a file, the NC program may
perform unexpected operation when executed. Be very careful when preparing
and editing an NC program on the host computer.
NOTE
1 Divide an NC program into files so that each file size is about 20 to 30 MB. If the
file size is too large, it takes time until DNC operation starts. If the file size is too
small, data transmission may stop between files and operation may stop.
2 Although you can divide an NC program at a point in a block, divide the program
in block units whenever possible and retract the tool at the end of each divided
file. This prevents data transmission from stopping at the end of a file and cutter
marking from being made.
3 Store the file list and relevant divided files in the same directory on the same
host computer.
- 19 -

32. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
3.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER
NOTE
The Data Server functions produce an effect when large NC programs are
operated. Use the Data Server Functions to handle large NC programs.
Memory operation
You can perform memory operation for an NC program on the memory card built into a Data Server in
the same way as for an NC program in the CNC memory.
You can also supply an NC program simultaneously for a multipath CNC system.
NOTE
When memory operation is performed, a selected NC program on the Data
Server must be a text file. It is impossible to use a binary file for memory
operation.
M198 subprogram operation
In the storage mode, you can perform M198 calling from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the
FTP or buffer mode, you can perform M198 calling form the host computer.
On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set an M198 folder in advance. When M198 calling is
specified, the set M198 folder is searched for the target subprogram.
DNC operation
In the storage mode, you can perform DNC operation from the memory card built into a Data Server. In
the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform DNC operation from the host computer.
On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set the file name for DNC operation in advance. When DNC
operation starts, the set DNC operation file is called.
3.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT
NC programs prepared on the host computer must have the following format:
% TITLE ;
O0001(COMMENT) ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M30 ;
%
An NC program starts with a start file mark (%). In the subsequent part (leader section) until EOB (;,
program start) is encountered, a comment such as a title can be inserted as necessary.
At the beginning of the program section, be sure to specify an O number or arbitrary file name consisting
of up to 32 characters that is enclosed with “<” and “>” as the program name. This O number or file name
must be used for management on the personal computer.
If the O number or arbitrary file name in an NC program and the file name in the personal computer are
not the same, the file name in the personal computer is used basically when the program is transferred
from the personal computer to the Data Server (NOTE 2).
- 20 -

33. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
The semicolon ";" used at the end of each block means EOB (end of block) and actually functions as LF
(LF: 0A in hexadecimal), CR-LF (CR: 0D in hexadecimal), or LF-CR-CR.
The NC program must end with "M code ; %".
When performing binary input operation, insert data for binary input operation, enclosed with the start
code and end code of binary input operation, into the part ". . ." in the above figure.
For details of the NC program configuration and binary input operation, refer to the relevant CNC
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
WARNING
If an NC program prepared on the host computer does not use the program
format specified by the CNC, executing the NC program can cause an
unpredictable operation. So, special care should be taken when an NC program
is prepared on the host computer.
NOTE
1 Any unrecognizable character codes in an NC program registered as a text file
on a memory card on a Data Server are ignored. Do not use any unrecognizable
character code.
A 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may be recognized as an invalid
character code when the system recognizes it on a byte-by-byte basis. Do not
use any 2-byte code used for Japanese and others.
2 The system always manages each text file on the memory card so that the file
name and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are the same. For
this reason, if they are different, the system sets the O number or arbitrary file
name to the file name when transferring the file. The O number or arbitrary file
name in the program can also be set as the file name when the file is transferred
according to the parameter setting, however.
- 21 -

34. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
3.6 LIST FILE FORMAT
In the LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE functions described later, one of the following list file
formats must be used:
Format 1 Format 3
% ; % ;
O0001(COMMENT) ; O0001(COMMENT) ;
N111 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
N222 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
N333 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
: :
: :
N999 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
% %
Format 2 Format 4
% ; % ;
O0001(COMMENT) ; O0001(COMMENT) ;
N111 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
N222 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
N333 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
: :
: :
N999 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
% %
Specifications common to all formats
<1> A list file begins with a start file mark "%".
<2> In the next block, be sure to specify an O number. Assign this O number as the file name.
A comment enclosed in parentheses "(" and ")" can be inserted between the O number and EOB.
<3> In the subsequent blocks, specify files to be processed.
<4> The list file must end with "%".
Specifications of format 1
The following describes the specifications of list file format 1:
<1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed have the format
"Oxxxx" (where "xxxx" denotes a 4-digit number). In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to
"N" when specifying the file name. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows
that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The
LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The
LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server.
- 22 -

35. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
Specifications of format 2
The following describes the specifications of list file format 2:
<1> This specification method applies when files to be processed are named "Oxxxx" (where "xxxx"
denotes a 4-digit number) on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and are named
arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. In this case, change "O" in file
name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name on the Fast Data Server. The 4-digit number
can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999
are processed sequentially.
A file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer can be specified by enclosing it with
parentheses "(" and ")" following the corresponding "Nxxxx". The characters that can be used in file
names depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Oxxxx" files. The
LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer as files with arbitrary file names "PC-File". The
LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server.
Specifications of format 3
The following describes the specifications of list file format 3:
<1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed are arbitrary file
names. In this case, file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and on the
built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be the same. Specify an arbitrary file name
enclosed with parentheses "(" and ")". The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names are the
following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "Dtsvr-File" stored on the built-in
hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server with the file
names kept unchanged.
The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer with the file names "Dtsvr-File" kept
unchanged. The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card
of the Fast Data Server.
Specifications of format 4
The following describes the specifications of list file format 4:
<1> This specification method applies when files to be processed have arbitrary file names. In this case,
file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and file names on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer are assumed to be different. Specify a file name on the built-in memory
card of the Fast Data Server and a file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer in
parentheses, separated by a comma ",".
The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are
the following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Dtsvr-File" files.
- 23 -

36. 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server to files with file name "PC-File" on the built-in hard disk of the host computer.
The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server.
Limitations on file names in a list file
The following limitations apply when file names are specified in a list file:
<1> The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are
the following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> Up to 255 characters can be used as an arbitrary file name on the built-in hard disk of the host
computer. However, the number of characters that can actually be used depends on the OS of the
host computer.
Storage locations of list files
The LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE services are useful functions for managing NC programs
in groups.
The places where list files are prepared vary depending on the service to be executed.
For the LIST-GET service, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in hard disk of the
host computer, so list files are placed also on the built-in hard disk of the host computer.
For the LIST-PUT and LIST-DELETE services, NC programs to be operated on are present on the
built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server, so list files are also prepared on the built-in memory card of
the Fast Data Server.
3.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION
The following functions are added to FTP Server function of Data Server.
• Increase of FTP Server connections.
The number of FTP server connections can be increased from five to ten by this feature.
• Connection with Windows Explorer.
When you use the Windows Explorer as an FTP client software, you can make a new folder and
overwrite a file.
For the FTP client operation using the Explorer, see APPENDIX D.2, "OPERATION USING THE
Explorer."
• Addition of maintenance screen for FTP server.
You can monitor the state of FTP server. And you can disconnect the connection of FTP client
forcedly.
For the operation of the maintenance screen, see Section 2.5, "FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE" in
Part VI, "MAINTENANCE."
NOTE
1 To use the DataServer Explorer connection, the DataServer Explorer connection
option (R953) is required.
2 Some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP
clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the
number of applications.
- 24 -

37. B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 4.FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
4 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
The FOCAS2/Ethernet functions can remotely control and monitor the CNC by using a personal
computer. For details, refer to the manual delivered with the FOCAS2 library software.
NOTE
1 In the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the CNC operates as a server and waits for a
communication start request from a personal computer that operates as a client.
As communication with the personal computer starts, two sockets are used for
control and monitoring from the personal computer and for file transfer.
2 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can
create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2
library software.
Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal
computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that
there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the
personal computer.
- 25 -

38. 5.DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
5 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS
If DNS/DHCP is used for communication setting of the Data Server functions and FOCAS2/Ethernet
functions, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) can be set at a time on the host computer to
facilitate Ethernet address control.
DNS
With the DNS function, a fully qualified domain name (e.g., www.fanuc.co.jp) can be specified instead of
a hard-to-remember IP address just consisting of numbers (e.g., 192.168.0.10) when a TCP/IP
communication destination is to be specified.
NOTE
To use the DNS function, a personal computer having the DNS server function is
additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION,"
in Part III, "SETTING," and APPENDIX C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP."
DHCP
With the DHCP function, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) that need to be set on the CNC
can be set on the host computer.
NOTE
To use the DHCP function, a personal computer having the DHCP server
function is additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING
UP DNS/DHCP."
- 26 -

39. 6.MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
6 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS
With the machine remote diagnosis functions, checking of the internal CNC status, ladder program
editing, and other operations can be performed as necessary by using a personal computer through a
LAN.
For details, refer to “Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-63734EN).”
- 27 -

40. 7. UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
7 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited
manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program
or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer
to periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated.
When the conventional function is used
Application software
Inquiry
Response Application checks for
CNC/PMC data changes.
When the unsolicited messaging function is used
NC program or ladder Application software
program アプリケーションソフトウェア
NC program or ladder
program checks for Application receives
Notification
CNC/PMC data notification from CNC.
changes.
NOTE
The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure
The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below.
1 Preparation on the personal computer
Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install
the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For the method of creating an application
using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the
unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION", in
"FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window Library Operator's Manual".
2 Preparation on the CNC
Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging.
For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Section 6.2, "EXECUTING THE
UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in Part III, “OPERATION.”
3 Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are
needed:
(1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
(2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
- 28 -

41. 7.UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION FUNCTION
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC
screen and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer.
For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Section 6.1, "SETTING OF THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part III, “OPERATION.”
4 Starting the NC program or ladder program
Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time,
no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited
messaging function", is executed.
5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function
Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places
the CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder
program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder
program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.
6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function
To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the
personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no
unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC
program or ladder program.
- 29 -

42. 8. FTP FILE TRANSFER
FUNCTION SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04
8 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
The FTP file transfer function is operated from the CNC to transfer a file. It works as an FTP client and
communicates with the FTP server on the host computer.
NOTE
1 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer
function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system
including communication with the personal computer because the personal
computer environment may affect communication operation.
2 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be
operated on the host computer.
- 30 -

43. III. SETTING

45. 1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
FUNCTION
This part describes the settings required to operate the following Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server functions:
• Data Server functions
• FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
• CNC screen display functions
• Machine remote diagnosis functions
• Unsolicited messaging function
• FTP file transfer function
Notes on using the functions for the first time
CAUTION
When setting the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server for the first time, carefully set
data such as an IP address and conduct a sufficient communication test,
consulting with your network administrator.
If data such as an IP address is not set correctly, a communication failure can
affect the entire network. Take sufficient care.
The load on the network may become greater than expected depending on the
performance of the personal computer. Before using the functions, completely
confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication
with the personal computer.
1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS
This section explains how to back up communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server to the
memory card and to restore them from the memory card.
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press the soft keys [COMMON] - [(OPRT)] and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE],
[ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring communication parameters
appear.
5 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
6 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key
[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed.
The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.
- 33 -

46. 1. SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
NOTE
With the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the USB memory can be used in addition to
the memory card.
BACKUP
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are saved from the SRAM of the CNC
main unit to the memory card.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “ETHERBRD.MEM”
is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are read from the memory card and
saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name
“ETHERBRD.MEM” is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server,
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are saved
from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM”
is used.
ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server,
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are read from
the memory card and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC,
that parameter is not saved to the SRAM.
- 34 -

47. 1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the parameters are
read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.
CAUTION
While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory
is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external
input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
NOTE
1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be
performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state.
2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that
requires power-off.
Related NC parameters
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other
devices.
NOTE
In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the memory card is used
regardless for this NC parameter.
- 35 -

48. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the communication setting for the Data Server functions.
Notes on using the Data Server functions
CAUTION
1 Operation cannot be guaranteed for any memory card that is not recommended
by FANUC.
2 When using the Fast Data Server for the first time, be sure to format the memory
card, set parameters, then turn the power off then back on. If an attempt is made
to use the Data Server functions without following these steps, normal operation
is not guaranteed.
3 Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Data Server for the first
time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address
and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in
settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence
such as a communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If a Data Server is used on a
network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure
intermittently occurs in the Data Server, which may cause a CNC system error.
4 When the power to the CNC is turned off during access to the memory card, files
stored on the memory card may be destroyed. So, be careful not to turn off the
power to the CNC during access to the memory card.
5 In preparation for damage to the memory card, always take backup copies of the
files stored on the memory card to the host computer.
NOTE
1 With the Data Server functions (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only one
FTP server.
2 With the Data Server functions (FTP server), a single CNC can connect up to
five FTP clients. However, some FTP client software programs may each
internally use two or more FTP clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP
clients is not always equal to the number of applications.
If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to
ten FTP clients.
For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER
Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
3 The Data Server functions do not support passive mode (PASV command).
2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Data Server functions.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
- 36 -

49. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that
appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION" provided later.
Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)
Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
set.
- 37 -

50. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used.
USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user
name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to
127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.
Operation
Select a connection destination.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST
SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].
2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host
computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or
3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection
destination host computer.
When connection destination 1 is selected
- 38 -

51. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)
Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.
By using page keys , the FTP server setting screen is displayed after the connection
destination 1, 2, or 3 screen.
Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)
Setting item
Item Description
USER NAME Specify a user name to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.
(A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.
(Up to 127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is used as a login folder.
Data Server MODE screen (SETTING)
Press soft key [DS MODE] to display the Data Server MODE screen (SETTING). The current mode can
be checked and changed.
- 39 -

52. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
Data Server screen (SETTING)
Display item
Item Description
CHANNELS Displays the number of channels currently being used.
MODE Displays the currently set Data Server mode.
STORAGE MODE
FTP MODE
BUFFER MODE
Operation
The Data Server mode can be changed.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft keys [STRAGE MODE], [FTP MODE], and [BUFFER
MODE].
2 To change the mode to a desired mode, press the soft key of the desired mode.
NOTE
1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function
option (J728) is required.
2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.
Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)
Press soft key [DS MODE] and press page keys to display maintenance information for each
channel.
- 40 -

53. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)
Display item
Item Description
CHANNEL Interface number of the buffer used for transferring NC programs between the CNC
and Data Server.
For example, a channel is assigned to each path.
EMPTY COUNTER Used for maintenance.
This item indicates the number of cases where the buffer becomes empty while NC
programs are being transferred from the Data Server to the CNC.
TOTAL SIZE Used for maintenance.
This item indicates the total number of bytes transferred when an NC program is
transferred from the Data Server.
WRITE POINTER Used for maintenance.
READ POINTER This item indicates the buffer use status when NC programs are transferred from
the Data Server to the CNC.
- 41 -

54. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
Data Server FORMAT screen
Press soft key [DS FORMAT] to display the format screen of the memory card built into the Data Server.
Data Server FORMAT screen
Display item
Item Description
DEVICE NAME Indicates the storage media currently being used by the Data Server.
"ATA" or "NONE" is indicated.
ATA : A memory card is mounted.
None : No memory card is mounted.
FORMAT TYPE Indicates the format type of the memory card.
"CNC FILE" or "---" is displayed.
When "---" is displayed, check whether the memory card is mounted properly and is
formatted correctly.
CHECK DISK Indicates the check result.
When no check is made : “-----“
When the check result is normal : “OK”
When the check result is abnormal : “NG”
Procedure (CHECK DISK)
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CHECK DISK].
2 Press soft key [EXEC] to check the format of the memory card and display the check result.
CAUTION
If the check result is abnormal, determine the cause of trouble from an error
message displayed on the ETHERNET LOG screen and back up the files stored
on the memory card immediately. Then, try to reformat the memory card.
- 42 -

55. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
NOTE
1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when a check disk is
made.
2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a
main program, the check disk operation cannot be performed.
Procedure (CNC FORMAT)
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CNC FORMAT].
2 Press soft key [EXEC] to format the memory card built into the Fast Data Server.
CAUTION
1 Do not turn off the power to the CNC when the memory card is being formatted.
Otherwise, the memory card can be damaged.
2 When the memory card is formatted, all files held on the memory card are
erased.
NOTE
1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when the memory
card is formatted.
2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a
main program, the memory card cannot be formatted.
2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
The NC parameters related to the Data Server functions are described below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 TVC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 TVC When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, a TV check is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for text files.
For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in
Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 5 : Selects the Data Server as the input/output device.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 NCR CRF CTV
[Input type] Setting input
- 43 -

56. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, character
counting for the TV check in program comment parts is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#2 CRF When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block)
is:
0: Set as specified by parameter NCR (bit 3 of parameter No. 100).
1: Set to "CR" "LF".
#3 NCR When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block)
is:
0: Set to "LF" "CR" "CR".
1: Set to "LF".
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for text files.
For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in
Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 LCH BWT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 BWT If FTP communication is behind data supply during DNC operation in the buffer mode of
the Data Server:
0: An error is caused.
1: No error is caused and DNC operation continues after waiting the completion of
FTP communication.
#7 LCH In the LIST-GET service of the Data Server, when a list file specifies 1025 or more files:
0: A check for duplicated file names is performed.
1: A check for duplicated file names is not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 DSF PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.
#3 DSF When an NC program is stored on the memory card of the Data Server:
0: The file name takes priority.
1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.
- 44 -

57. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when files on a personal computer are
registered as text files on the memory card on the Data Server by
CNC operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0906 SCM OVW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 OVW When the Data Server is operated as an FTP server, if a file having the same name as a
file to be transferred from the FTP client is already stored in the memory card of Data
Server:
0: An error is caused.
1: No error is caused and the existing file is overwritten.
NOTE
To use this parameter, the DataServer Explorer connection option
is required.
#5 SCM As the mode for accessing the memory card on the Data Server:
0: The mode supported by the memory card that is automatically determined is used.
1: The conventional PIO mode 2 is used.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS.
0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS.
0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX/VMS.
2: Linux.
NOTE
Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,
the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.
0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet function wait time setting
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specifies the wait time (in 1 ms units) for the FOCAS2/Ethernet service when it is used
together with the Data Server functions.
If 0 is specified, a wait time of 1 ms is assumed.
- 45 -

58. 2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
0929 Specifies the attribute of the file to be transferred in operating as an FTP server.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
Specifies whether to use the file attribute specified in the FTP TYPE command when the
Data Server operates as an FTP server.
No.929 Meaning
0 Uses the file attribute specified in the TYPE command from the FTP client.
1 Fixes the attribute to text.
2 Fixes the attribute to binary.
Maximum number of files that can be registered to the memory card of the Data Server and maximum
0930
size per file that can be registered
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0, 10 to 15
No.930 Maximum number of files Maximum size per file
0 2047 512MB
10 511 2048MB
11 1023 1024MB
12 2047 512MB
13 4095 256MB
14 8191 128MB
15 16383 64MB
NOTE
1 When the memory card is formatted after this parameter is set, the
maximum number of files and maximum size per file are changed.
2 Each folder is counted as one file.
3 This parameter is valid when the series and edition of the Data
Server function software are edition 11 or later of series 6569.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 SOR
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 SOR In the Data Server FILE LIST screen, files are displayed:
0: In the order of zero-suppressed program number.
1: In the order of program name.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3233 PDM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PDM When the Data Server FILE LIST screen is displayed:
0: The setting of an M198 operation folder/DNC operation file is enabled.
1: The setting of a foreground/background folder is enabled.
- 46 -

59. 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
NOTE
When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is
performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0.
For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter,
"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of
the CNC.
2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the Data Server functions is given below. In this example of setting,
one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a Data Server.
HUB
100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
The common setting screen is
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 used for setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None
CONNECT 1 PORT NUMBER 21 21
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200
USER NAME user user The Data Server setting screen
is used for setting.
PASSWORD user user
LOGIN FOLDER None None The Data Server mode setting
DATA SERVER MODE Storage Storage screen is used for setting.
NC Parameter NO. 20 5 5
NC parameter setting
PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer
IP address 192.168.0.200 (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway None "User account” of the personal computer
User name user (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Password user
Home folder default "Internet service manager" of the personal computer
(Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
- 47 -

60. 3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen
display functions.
CAUTION
Before performing communication using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions for the
first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network
address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error
in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence
such as a communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If the FOCAS2/Ethernet
functions are used on a network involved with a communication failure, a
communication failure intermittently occurs in FOCAS2/Ethernet, which may
cause a CNC system error.
Note on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
NOTE
With the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, up to 20 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be
connected to one CNC.
Note on using the CNC screen display functions
NOTE
With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function
client can be connected to one CNC.
3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen
display functions.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 48 -

61. 3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.
- 49 -

62. 3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC
screen display functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.
3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 6 : Selects the FOCAS2/Ethernet as the input/output device. This parameter is required
only for DNC operation, however.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 DNE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 DNE During DNC operation using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the termination of DNC
operation is:
0: Waited.
1: Not waited. (FOCAS2/HSSB compatible specification)
0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet waiting time setting
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When the FOCAS2/Ethernet and Data Server functions are used simultaneously, this
parameter sets the FOCAS2/Ethernet function waiting time in milliseconds.
- 50 -

63. 3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTIONS
When a value of 0 is set, the functions operate with assuming that 1 millisecond is
specified.
3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions is given below. In this example of
setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a FOCAS2/Ethernet.
HUB
100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
The common setting screen is used for
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 8193 The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0 0 setting.
TIME INTERVAL 0 0
PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is
used for setting.
Default gateway None
NC IP address 192.168.0.100
CNC 1 Specify these items with the arguments of
NC TCP port number 8193
the data window library function
NC IP address 192.168.0.101 "cnc_allclibhnd13."
CNC 2
NC TCP port number 8193
- 51 -

64. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of the DNS/DHCP function.
4.1 SETTING OF DNS
This section describes the setting procedure for operating DNS client function.
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS client function according to Section 4.3, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"
provided later.
2 Set up the DNS server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,
"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP."
3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DNS server operates (hereinafter referred to as
the "DNS server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press
[COMMON] to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
5 As the DNS IP address, enter the IP address of the DNS server.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.
- 52 -

65. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
4.2 SETTING OF DHCP
This section describes the setting procedure for operating DHCP client function.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP client function according to Section 4.3 "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"
provided later.
2 Set up the DHCP server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,
"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP."
3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DHCP server operates (hereinafter referred to as
the "DHCP server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press
[COMMON] to display the COMMON screen.
5 If the DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled and a connection is made successfully with the
DHCP server, the following items are set automatically from the DHCP server:
• IP ADDRESS
• SUBNET MASK
• ROUTER IP ADDRESS
• DNS IP ADDRESS
• DOMAIN
If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is indicated in each
item.
6 Moreover, if the DNS client function is enabled at the same time and the DHCP server interacts with
the DNS server (the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a desired host name.
COMMON screens (BASIC, DETAIL)
Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screens (BASIC and
DETAIL). If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server and setting data is acquired, the
following is displayed:
When a connection with the DHCP server has been made successfully
If no host name is set, the CNC automatically sets a host name in the format "NC-<MAC address>".
- 53 -

66. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
Example of host name automatically set
If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, the following is displayed:
When an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server has failed
Check item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, data acquired
SUBNET MASK from the DHCP server is displayed.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 ERROR" is displayed.
DOMAIN
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter a desired CNC host name.
If the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server, this host name is posted to the
DNS server.
If no host name is set, "NC-<MAC address>" is automatically set.
Example of host name automatically set:
NC-00E0E4004CF9
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address
- 54 -

67. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DHCP DNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 DNS The DNS client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#6 DHC The DHCP client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP
NOTE
This section provides examples of setting for Windows 2000 Server which
supports dynamic DNS.
4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server
When a connection is made with the FTP server of the host computer (hereinafter referred to as the "FTP
server") by using the Data Server function, the IP address of the CNC can be set from the DHCP server
by enabling the DHCP client function of the CNC.
Moreover, by enabling the DNS client function of the CNC, an FTP server can be specified with a host
name instead of an IP address.
Example of specifying a connection destination with a host name (FTPServer-1)
- 55 -

68. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
Setting the DNS server / DHCP server
Operating system
It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system.
Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the DNS server
The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the FTP server
For FTP server setting, see Appendix B, "EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP."
Setting the CNC
Parameter
To enable the DNS client function, set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.
4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data
Server
The Data Server (FTP server function) can be accessed by specifying a host name from an FTP client
where an FTP client operates (hereinafter referred to as an "FTP client"), using the interaction between
the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server.
The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.
Flow of operation
When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 A host name is set on the CNC.
2 When the power is turned on, the Data Server posts the host name to the DHCP server.
3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names
and CNC IP addresses is updated.
When operation is performed from an FTP client
1 An FTP client inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC.
2 The FTP client acquires the IP address of the CNC.
3 The FTP client communicates with the FTP server of the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.
- 56 -

69. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
FTP client
(4) Inquires about the IP
address of CNC-1.
Windows 2000 Server
The FTP client DHCP server /DNS server
specifies a CNC
by its name
(CNC-1) instead
(5) Returns the IP address.
of its IP address.
(6) Performs communication.
(1) Sets the name.
(2) Posts CNC-1 at
power-on time.
CNC-1
(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.
Setting the DNS server/DHCP server
Operating system
It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP
server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)
Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the DNS server
The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the CNC
Parameter
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.
As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server is used.
4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function
Ethernet parameters can be set with no setting performed from the CNC, using the interaction between the
DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server.
The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.
Flow of operation
When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 A host name is set on the CNC.
- 57 -

70. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
2 When the power is turned on, the CNC posts the host name to the DHCP server.
3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names
and CNC IP addresses is updated.
When FOCAS2/Ethernet application software is executed
1 The user's application inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC.
2 The user's application acquires the IP address of the CNC.
3 The user's application communicates with the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.
User's application software
(FOCAS2/Ethernet) (4) Inquires about the IP
address of CNC-1. Windows 2000 Server
The application software DHCP server / DNS server
specifies a CNC by its
name (CNC-1) instead of
its IP address. (5) Returns the IP address.
(6) Performs
(1) Sets the name. communication.
(2) Posts CNC-1 at
power-on time.
CNC-1
(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.
Setting the DNS server/DHCP server
Operating system
It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP
server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)
Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the DNS server
The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the CNC
Parameter
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.
As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server is used.
- 58 -

71. 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/04 SETTING FUNCTION
When the DHCP function is enabled, the FOCAS2/Ethernet-related parameters are automatically set if bit
3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 0. If bit 3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 1, the parameters for i
CELL communication are automatically set.
- 59 -

72. 5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the machine remote diagnosis functions.
For explanation of the entire machine remote diagnosis functions, refer to "Machine Remote Diagnosis
Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63734EN)."
5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the
items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
- 60 -

73. 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
Item Description
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4 "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.
- 61 -

74. 5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions
(FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)
Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).
Machine remote diagnosis screen (BASIC)
- 62 -

75. 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
Setting item
Item Description
MTB ID This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that
the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool
builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the
machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from
the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder.
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")
MACHINE ID Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine
under diagnosis
(Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)
Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screens (INQUIRY1):
Screen when the DNS function is disabled (left) and screen when the function is enabled (right)
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is disabled.
(Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203")
Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis
functions are used.
INQUIRY NAME Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis
accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "FANUC LTD.")
- 63 -

76. 5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
0024 Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 DNS The DNS function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP
ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8706 MRD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#6 MRD Type of communication device to be used by the machine remote diagnosis function:
0: The machine remote diagnosis function is not used.
1: The Fast Ethernet board is used.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
- 64 -

77. 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC
You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote
diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to
the PMC ladder.
5.3.1 Signals
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0141 DIAREQ DIASTP INQU2 INQU1 INQU0
DIAREQ <G0141.5>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the
inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry
destination (INQU0 to INQU2). When the acceptance completion signal (RMTEND) or
acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".
DIASTP <G0141.4>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel
acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".
INQU2 <G0141.2>
INQU1 <G0141.1>
INQU0 <G0141.0>
[Name] Inquiry number select signals
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis
[Operation] Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine
remote signal.
INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 Status
0 0 0 No selection
0 0 1 Inquiry destination 1
0 1 0 Inquiry destination 2
0 1 1 Inquiry destination 3
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0082 RMTCLS
RMTCLS <F0082.3>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.
- 65 -

78. 5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote
diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When the signal to
request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", this signal is set to
"0".
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0083 RMTCAN RMTEND DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0
RMTCAN <F0083.7>
[Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to
start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request
machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".
RMTEND <F0083.6>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine
remote diagnosis accepting server.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to
start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request
machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".
DIAST5 <F0083.5>
DIAST4 <F0083.4>
DIAST3 <F0083.3>
DIAST2 <F0083.2>
DIAST1 <F0083.1>
DIAST0 <F0083.0>
[Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.
DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0 Description
0 0 0 0 0 0 No status
0 0 0 0 0 1 OPEN
0 0 0 0 1 0 OPENING
0 0 0 0 1 1 ACCEPTED
0 0 0 1 0 0 REFUSED
0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 0 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 1 CLOSE
0 0 1 0 0 0 FORCE CLOSING
0 0 1 0 0 1 ERROR
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0088 DIAER7 DIAER6 DIAER5 DIAER4 DIAER3 DIAER2 DIAER1 DIAER0
DIAER7 <F0088.7>
- 66 -

79. 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
DIAER6 <F0088.6>
DIAER5 <F0088.5>
DIAER4 <F0088.4>
DIAER3 <F0088.3>
DIAER2 <F0088.2>
DIAER1 <F0088.1>
DIAER0 <F0088.0>
[Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is
0 to 255 in binary format.
5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts
This section describes control of the start and forced termination of machine remote diagnosis according
to the signals from the PMC using timing charts.
5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted
INQU0 (G141.0)
INQU1 (G141.1)
INQU2 (G141.2)
<1>
DIAREQ (G141.5) <4>
<2>
RMTEND (F083.6) <3> <5>
The start of machine remote
diagnosis is accepted.
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion
signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1".
<4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".
- 67 -

80. 5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/04
5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected
INQU0 (G141.0)
INQU1 (G141.1)
INQU2 (G141.2)
<1>
DIAREQ (G141.5) <4>
<2>
RMTCAN (F083.7) <3> <5>
The start of machine remote
diagnosis is rejected.
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1".
<4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal
to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for
machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".
5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated
DIASTP (G141.4) <2>
RMTCLS (F082.3) <1> <3>
Machine remote diagnosis is
forcibly terminated.
<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1".
<2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to
"1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0".
<3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the
machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.
- 68 -

81. 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions is given below. In this
example of setting, one personal computer functions as the machine remote diagnosis accepting server
and machine remote diagnosis client and is connected to one CNC.
HUB
100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)
CNC 1 PC 1
CNC 1
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 The common setting screen is used for
setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0
setting.
TIME INTERVAL 0
MTB ID FANUC
MACHINE ID 217XXX-101XXXXX The machine remote diagnosis screen is
INQUIRY 1 : HOST NAME 192.168.0.200 used for setting.
INQUIRY 1 : PORT NUMBER 8194
PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the
IP address 192.168.0.200 personal computer (Windows
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting.
Default gateway None
Accepting server : PORT NUMBER 8194 "Diagnosis accepting server setting" of the
Proxy server : PORT NUMBER 8193 machine remote diagnosis package is
Accepts all diagnosis used for setting.
MTB ID
requests.
- 69 -

82. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function.
6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Unsolicited Messaging function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [UNSOLI MSG] and then enter parameters for the
items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
- 70 -

83. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screen (DETAIL). Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.
- 71 -

84. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the Unsolicited Messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.
- 72 -

85. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
6.1.1 Selection of Mode
This Subsection describes how to select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC).
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen1 (Basic)
Setting item
Item Description
MODE Select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.
Refer to the next Operation for the setting method.
For “CNC MODE”:
This mode is for the setting by the CNC screen. In this case, the setting by the personal
computer is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting method by CNC screen” for details.
For “PC MODE”:
This mode is for the setting by the personal computer. In this case, the setting by the CNC
screen is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.3, “Setting method by personal computer” for
details.
NOTE
1 When you use this function for the first time, the mode is “PC MODE”.
2 The change of mode is possible under only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to the
next Display item for the state “Not Ready”.
3 When you change from “CNC MODE” to “PC MODE”, all setting parameters of
the Unsolicited Messaging function are cleared.
Operation
The mode can be changed.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [MODE].
- 73 -

86. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
2 Press soft key [MODE] to display soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE].
3 Press soft key of the mode that you want to change.
Display item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS The IP address of the connecting personal computer as a Unsolicited Messaging Server is
displayed.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS The Current status is displayed.
The kind of status is the following five states.
[1] Not Ready
The state that data are not transmitted even if there is a data transmission request by NC
program or Ladder program.
[2] Ready
The state that data are transmitted by a data transmission request by NC program or Ladder
program.
[3] Sending…
The state from acceptance of the request until completion of data transmission.
[4] Receiving…
The state from completion of data transmission until receiving the response data.
[5] Completed
The state from receiving the response data until completion of receiving operation.
<Complement>
- The data transmission:
This means that the Unsolicited Message is transferred from the CNC to the personal
computer.
- The response data:
This means that the response of Unsolicited Message is transferred from the personal
computer to the CNC.
NOTE
1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” from the personal computer to
change the status from “Not Ready” to “Ready”.
2 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” from the personal computer to
change the status from except for “Not Ready” to “Not Ready”.
3 Refer to Section 6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION” for timing charts of status.
6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen
This section describes how to set the parameters by the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen.
NOTE
1 Operate the following procedures in order to enable the parameters and start the
Unsolicited Message transmission.
(1) Set all setting items of the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY].
(3) Execute FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start Unsolicited Messaging
the from the personal computer.
- 74 -

87. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
NOTE
2 The input to Setting item and the execution of soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY] in
the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) are possible under only the
state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode”
for the status “Not Ready”.
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] and page keys to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE
screen (CONNECT).
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 2 (CONNECT) UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 3 (CONNECT)
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer when the DNS function is disabled.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
Specify the host name of the host computer when the DNS function is enabled. (You can
specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")
PORT NUMBER Specify a TCP port number and a UDP port number. Usually, specify "8196".
Input range: 5001 to 65535
RETRY COUNT Specify the retry count when the server does not respond to the client message.
Input range: 0 to 32767
TIMEOUT Specify the timeout (second) for the response of the transmitted data.
Input range: 1 to 32767
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in seconds) at which to send the alive signal during normal
operation.
Specify the value that is less than TIMEOUT.
Input range: 1 to 32767
- 75 -

88. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
Item Description
CONTROL Specify the type of the control parameter. The control parameter is not effective when this
PARAMETER parameter is “0”.
TYPE - “1”: PMC address (Response Notice method)
- “2”: PMC address (Simple method)
- “3”: Custom macro variables (Simple method)
- “4”: Volatile RTM variables (Simple method)
CONTROL Specify the control parameter to execute the data transmission.
PARAMETER In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “1”:
Specify a PMC address for control.
The available PMC area is R and E.
Two bytes are allowed from this PMC address.
CONTROL In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “2”:
PARAMETER Specify a PMC address for control.
The available PMC area is R and E.
One byte is allowed from this PMC address.
In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a custom macro variable number for control. The available custom macro
variables are the volatile common variables.
One variable is allowed from this variable number.
In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “4”:
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
The available RTM variables are the volatile RTM variables.
One variable is allowed from this variable number.
TRANSMISSION Specify a number of the transmission data.
NUMBER Input range: 1 to 3
TRANSMISSION Specify the parameter of each transmission data.
PARAMETER
(NO.1-3)
TYPE Specify the type of the transmission data. The transmission parameters are not effective
when this parameter is “0”.
- “1” or “2”: PMC address
- “3”: Custom macro variables
- “4”: Volatile RTM variables
- “5”: Nonvolatile RTM variables
PMC Specify the top of area for the transmission data.
ADRESS, or In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”:
MACRO NO. Specify a PMC address for transmission.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:
Specify a RTM variable number for transmission.
SIZE, or Specify a size of area or a number for the transmission data.
NUMBER The available maximum size is below.
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “1”: 2890 bytes
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “2”: 2874 bytes in total
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “3”: 2858 bytes in total
Exchange one variable for eight bytes when the macro variables (the custom macro variables
or the RTM variables) are used.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”:
Specify a size of area for the transmission data.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a number of the macro variables for the transmission data. And, when the macro
variable number is larger than 1000 (a system variable), specify “1” to this parameter.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:
Specify a number of the RTM variables for the transmission data.
- 76 -

89. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
CAUTION
1 When setting a PMC address for control and transmission, keep the following in
mind.
(1) For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only
a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for
the first path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
(2) The area of a PMC address for control cannot overlap each other area when
other functions (FL-net, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, and CC-Link) are used.
2 When setting a macro variable for control and transmission, keep the following in
mind.
(1) For a multi-path CNC, enter a macro variable as follows:
<Path number>:<Variable number>
For #100 for the second CNC path, for example, enter "2:100". When only a
variable number (100) is entered, it is assumed to be the variable number for
the first path (1:100).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
(2) The macro variables for control cannot overlap the variables of use except for
the Unsolicited Messaging function.
NOTE
1 In the methods to specify a PMC address for CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE,
there are the Response Notice method and the Simple method. Refer to Section
6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING” for details.
2 The available range of a PMC address depends on the available PMC Memory
Type.
3 The available range of a custom macro variable and a RTM variable depends on
the valid option.
The RTM variable means a real-time custom macro variable.
No real-time custom macro variable can be used with the Series 35i-B.
4 Set the number of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3) to TRANSMISSION
NUMBER. For example, when TRANSMISSION NUMBER is “3”, if there are one
or more non-effective value in TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3), an error
occurs by pressing soft key [APPLY].
Operation
The all setting items in UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) become effective.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [APPLY].
2 Press soft key [APPLY].
- 77 -

90. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer
Create Application software by using the FOCAS2 functions if you set the parameters by the personal
computer.
• cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Setting of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging (2)
• cnc_unsolicstart Start of the Unsolicited Messaging
Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC
Data window library” for details
NOTE
1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start the Unsolicited
Message transmission after you execute the FOCAS2 function
“cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.
2 The Execution of the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is possible under
only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection
of mode” for the status “Not Ready”.
3 The setting values set by the personal computer are displayed in the
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) after the FOCAS2 function
“cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is executed.
6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
This section describes how to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function.
The method to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function is the following three ways
• In case of the Response Notice method by using a PMC address for control.
• In case of the Simple method by using a PMC address for control.
• In case of the Simple method by using a macro variable for control.
NOTE
1 When the Ladder program is used, there are the Response Notice method and
the Simple method. A main difference is the followings. In the former, the
response RES_CODE of the data transmission is notified to the Ladder
program. In the latter, the response of the data transmission isn’t notified to the
Ladder program.
Choose the Response Notice when you want to apply the Ladder program used
by Series 16i etc. If it is not necessary to receive the response RES_CODE, it is
easy to use the simple method.
2 RES_CODE is recorded in the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server when “0x00” or “0x01” as RES_CODE is detected.
3 Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC
FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the details of
RES_CODE.
- 78 -

91. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice
method)
This subsection describes how to use the Response Notice method.
NOTE
Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder
program transmits a macro variable.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.
Signals of PMC address for control
This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control when the Unsolicited Messaging
function is used. The area of a PMC address for the control is two bytes. The following indicates the case
that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC path
number is omitted
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Signal to request the message transmission
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.
[Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepares the message. Then the message
will be transmitted to the personal computer.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Signal to notify the response of the message
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the response of the Unsolicited Message is received.
[Output condition] The response of the message is transmitted from the personal computer to the CNC (the
communication board).
When the CNC (the communication board) receives the response of the message, “1” is
set to this signal. When “1” is set to this signal, the Ladder program reads out the
response code (RES_CODE) and sets “0” to the signal REQ. Then the CNC (the
communication board) will clear RES_CODE and this signal.
COM <Rxxxx+1.6>
[Name] Signal to notify the start of the message transmission
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the Unsolicited Message transmission is starting.
[Output condition] When the message transmission to the personal computer is started, “1” is set to this
signal. When the message transmission is completed, “0” is set to this signal.
RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5>
[Name] Indicates the response code of the message
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This code indicates the response code of the Unsolicited Message.
- 79 -

92. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
[Output condition] The response code of the message is set. The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ
after reading out this code. Then this code will be cleared by CNC (the communication
board).
NOTE
Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the
details of RES_CODE.
Timing charts of PMC address for control
This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Response
Notice method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]
STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready
REQ (Ladder -> Board) <1>
<2>
<6>
COM (Board -> Ladder) <3>
RES (Board -> Ladder) <5>
<4>
<7>
RES_CODE (Board -> Ladder)
Ladder : Ladder Program The data transmission The response
Board : Communication Board has been finished becomes available
<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms
that the signal RES has been “0”.
<2> The communication board sets “1” to the COM signal because “1” is set to the signal REQ, and the
message transmission is started.
<3> The communication board sets “0” to the signal COM when the message transmission is completed.
<4> The communication board sets the RES_CODE and sets “1” to the signal RES when the response of
the message is received.
<5> The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ after its program read out the RES_CODE and the
RES signal is “1”.
<6> The communication board clears the RES_CODE because “0” is set to the signal REQ.
<7> The communication board sets “0” to the signal RES.
NOTE
Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.
- 80 -

93. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method)
This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a PMC address for control.
NOTE
Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder
program transmits a macro variable.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.
Signals of PMC address for control
This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control to execute the Unsolicited
Messaging function. The area of a PMC address for the control is one byte. The following indicates the
case that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC
path number is omitted
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Signal to request the message transmission
[Classification] Input signal/Output signal
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.
[Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepare the message. Then the message
will be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message is
received, this signal is cleared by CNC (the communication board).
Timing charts of PMC address for control
This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Simple
method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]
STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready
REQ (Ladder <-> Board) <1>
<2>
<5>
Transmitting operation(Board) <3>
Receiving operation(Board) <4>
Ladder : Ladder Program The data transmission The response is
Board : Communication Board has been finished received
<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms
that the signal REQ has been “0”.
<2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the signal REQ.
- 81 -

94. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed.
<4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message
is received.
<5> The communication board sets “0” to the signal REQ after the receiving operation is completed.
NOTE
1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.
When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice
method described in Subsection 6.2.1.
2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.
6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)
This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a macro variable for control.
The way to use a custom macro variable and a RTM variable in the macro variables for control is the
same.
NOTE
Both a macro variable as the control parameter and a PMC address as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the NC
program transmits a PMC data.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are macro variables.
Macro Variables for control
This describes the details of the macro variable for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function.
The area of the macro variable for control is one variable. The following indicates the case that “#xxxx”
is used as a macro variable for control. “#xxxx” means a macro variable that the CNC path number is
omitted
REQ <#xxxx>
[Name] Variable to request the message transmission
[Classification] Input variable/Output variable
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.
[Operation] Set “1” to this variable after the NC program prepare the message. Then the message will
be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message received, this
variable is cleared by CNC (the communication board).
NOTE
The input and output value in the variable REQ is a real number. Therefore “0”
and “1” indicate “0.0” and “1.0”.
Timing charts of macro variables for control
This describes the timing charts of the macro variable for control when using the Simple method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.
- 82 -

95. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]
STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready
1
REQ (NC <-> Board) 0 <1> <2>
<5>
Transmitting operation(Board) <3>
Receiving operation(Board) <4>
NC : NC Program The data transmission The response is
Board : Communication Board has been finished received
<1> The NC program prepares the message and sets “1” to the variable REQ after its program confirms
that the variable REQ has been “0”.
<2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the variable REQ.
<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed.
<4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message
is received.
<5> The communication board sets “0” to the variable REQ after the receiving operation is completed.
NOTE
1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.
When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice
method described in Subsection 6.2.1.
2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.
Example to use macro variables for control
This describes the example to use the macro variable for control.
• Example
[Contents]
In the NC program of the CNC path number “1”, the way to transmit the date and time by using
macro variables is explained.
[Setting]
The volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used as the macro variable for control. And, the
date and time (the system variable number #3011, #3012) managed in the CNC are used as the
macro variable for transmission.
- 83 -

96. 6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
Setting item Setting value
CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0
TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3011
NUMBER 1
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3012
NUMBER 1
[Example of the NC program]
The RTM executes the next NC command of the RTM at the same time. At this time, the RTM
doesn't influence the operation timing of the next NC command of the RTM.
Therefore, the date and time when the NC command 2 is executed is notified.
RTM for control of the Unsolicited Messaging
//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; <1>
NC Program #RV[0]=1;
・ ZEND;
・
・
NC Command 1
One cycle of the Macro Call Command
machining program NC Command 2
・
・
・
(Reference) <1> in the example corresponds to <1> in the timing charts above.
NOTE
1 If a custom macro variable is used as the macro variable for control, be careful
to influence the operation timing of the NC command. For example, if the RTM
for control of the above example is replaced to a custom macro, the NC
command 2 isn’t executed unless the macro variable for control changes.
2 Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center
System) for the details of a custom macro and a RTM.
6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DHC DNS UNM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 UNM The CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 84 -

97. 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
#5 DNS The DNS function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#6 DHC The DHCP function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP
ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 UNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 UNS In the Unsolicited Messaging function, when the stop request of the Unsolicited
Messaging function is received excluding the connecting Unsolicited Messaging server:
0: The stop request is rejected.
1: The stop request is accepted.
- 85 -

98. 7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER
FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FTP File Transfer function.
Notes on using the FTP File Transfer function
CAUTION
Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Ethernet for the first time,
consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and
other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings
such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a
communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a
network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure
intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error.
NOTE
1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only
one FTP server.
2 The FTP File Transfer function does not support passive mode (PASV
command).
3 When setting the option (S737) of the Data Server function, the FTP File
Transfer function is unavailable.
7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
This section describes the setting screen for operating the FTP File Transfer function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is
no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 86 -

99. 7.SETTING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING TRANSFER FUNCTION
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION" provided later.
- 87 -

100. 7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
FTP Trans screens (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)
Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP Trans screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
set.
FTP Trans screens (for connection destination 1)
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used.
USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user
name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to
127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.
Operation
Select a connection destination.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST
SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].
- 88 -

101. 7.SETTING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 SETTING TRANSFER FUNCTION
2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host
computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or
3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection
destination host computer.
When connection destination 1 is selected
7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS
The NC parameters related to the FTP File Transfer function are described below.
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 5 : Selects the FTP File transfer function as the input/output device.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0901 EFT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 EFT The FTP file transfer function by the Fast Ethernet board is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is valid only for Path 1.
3 If Data Server function is valid, FTP File Transfer function cannot
be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.
- 89 -

102. 7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/04
0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS.
0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS.
0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX/VMS.
2: Linux.
NOTE
Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,
the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.
- 90 -

103. 8.ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED
B-64014EN/04 SETTING DURING PARAMETER SETTING
8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING
PARAMETER SETTING
This chapter explains the error messages that are issued when Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server parameters
are set.
Messages Meaning and action to be taken
Communication Software is not Check whether the communication software is installed.
found
Ethernet board is not found Check whether the Ethernet board is installed.
Software Version Error The communication software version is illegal.
Check the software version.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE A numeric parameter value is beyond the range.
Wrong Character(s) An illegal character is used in a character parameter.
Format Error Input data such as an IP address has an illegal input format.
too many figures A value input in a numeric parameter consists of too many digits.
Data was rejected A parameter error is found.
Confirm the setting conditions described in the relevant manual.
Reading from SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed.
Writing into SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed.
DHCP is available When the DHCP function is enabled, it is impossible to input parameters
manually from the setting screen.
To input parameters manually, disable the DHCP function.
Error(xxxx) Other errors.
Report the displayed message.
- 91 -

105. IV. OPERATION

107. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the Data Server functions.
On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected
via the embedded Ethernet, memory card built into the Fast Data Server, or host computer connected via
the Fast Data Server can be handled by selecting a device.
Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B
CNC memory
Memory card
Via embedded
Ethernet
File list
FAST Data Server
Memory card
PROGRAM FOLDER screen Via FAST Data Server
File list
In this chapter, the method of handling files on the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and on the
host computer connected via the Fast Data Server is described.
1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys,
press the continue key.)
- 95 -

108. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
PROGRAM FOLDER screen
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable
devices.
4 When you press soft key [DTSVR], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen
is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the
Fast Data Server to enable file operation.
5 When you press soft key [DTSVR HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER
screen is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the
host computer to enable file operation.
1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN
If [DTSVR] is selected to change the device on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, the contents (DATA
SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server are displayed to enable
file operation.
The information displayed on the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen partly changes, depending on the
setting of bit 1 (PDM) of NC parameter No. 3233.
When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0, an M198 operation folder and DNC operation file
can be set.
When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1, foreground/background folders can be set.
- 96 -

109. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=0 (No.3233#1=0)
DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=1 (No.3233#1=1)
Display item
M198 OPE FOLDER
Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling. This item is displayed when bit 1
(PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
- 97 -

110. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
DNC OPE FILE
Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
FOREGROUND FOLDER / BACKGROUND FOLDER
Displays foreground/background folders (directories). This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.
CONNECT HOST
Displays the work folder and the number of the host currently connected.
USED PAGE / FREE PAGE
Displays the size used of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and the size that is free.
USED FILES / FREE FILES
Displays the total number of folders (files) in use of the Data Server and the number of remaining free
folders (files).
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the memory card built into the Fast Data Server is selected, "DATA_SV"
is indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the current work folder.
File list
Displays information about the files and folders in the current work folder.
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the memory card built
into the Fast Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR].
DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is
set to 0.
M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
FORE CHANGE / BACK CHNAGE
Specifies a foreground/background folder. These soft keys can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter
No. 3233 is set to 1.
MAIN PROGRM
Selects a file as a main program.
DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON
Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.
- 98 -

111. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
SELECT START
Selects multiple files.
COPY
Copies a file or files.
MOVE
Moves a file or files from one folder to another.
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current work folder.
PUT
Transfers a file from the Data Server to the host computer.
MPUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer.
LIST-PUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.
LIST-DELETE
Deletes multiple files from the Data Server according to a list file.
READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled
only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.
PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is
enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is
set to “5”.
REFRESH
Updates the display information of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
- 99 -

112. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
NOTE
The operations of soft keys [CREATE FOLDER], [DELETE], [RENAME],
[COPY], [MOVE], and [LIST-DELETE] are the target operations of the memory
protection key.
This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations
result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed.
For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION) of the CNC.
1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List
REFRESH, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name, size, and date.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file list with file attributes and comments. A comment
statement immediately following the O number of a file is displayed. When there is no comment
statement, the contents starting with the beginning of the file are displayed.
NOTE
1 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory
operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode.
2 The file attribute of a binary file is displayed as "R/B" to the right of the comment.
MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.
1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.
2 Press the MDI key .
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.
1 Move to a new folder to be created.
2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
NOTE
1 Up to six levels of folders can be created.
2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder.
3 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered
decreases by one.
4 No folder may be able to be created, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
- 100 -

113. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
- Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
- Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 The initial folder cannot be deleted.
2 A folder can be deleted only when the folder is empty.
(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.)
3 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
Specifying multiple files
Multiple files can be deleted at a time.
1 Press soft key [SELECT START].
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 No folder can be specified.
2 Files may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
3 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
DELETE (new specification)
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
- 101 -

114. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 The initial folder cannot be deleted.
3 Folders can also be specified and deleted only when the folders are empty.
(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.)
4 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.
2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].
NOTE
1 The initial folder cannot be renamed.
2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder.
3 Files and folders may not be able to be renamed, depending on the status such
as operation state or protection state.
SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.
1 Enter a desired file name.
2 Press soft key [SEARCH].
- 102 -

115. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
COPY
Only one file
A file can be copied within the same folder.
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.
3 Key the name of a copy destination file.
4 Press soft key [COPY].
NOTE
1 Copy operation is impossible if the same file name is specified as a copy source
file and copy destination file.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files can be copied.
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press soft key [SELECT START].
3 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.
4 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be copied.
5 Press soft key [SELECT END].
6 Move to a copy destination folder.
7 Press soft key [COPY].
NOTE
1 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source
folder and copy destination folder.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
COPY (new specification)
Only one file
One file can be copied.
1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [COPY].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
2 Move to a copy destination folder.
3 Press soft key [PASTE].
To rename and copy the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key
[PASTE].
- 103 -

116. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
Selecting a range
Multiple files can be copied.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be copied.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [COPY].
5 Move to a copy destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files can be copied.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [COPY].
5 Move to a copy destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].
NOTE
1 Copy operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 With copy operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a
folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s)
are copied.
3 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source
folder and copy destination folder.
4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
MOVE
A file or files can be moved.
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press soft key [SELECT START].
3 By using cursor keys , select a move source file.
4 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be moved.
5 Press soft key [SELECT END].
6 Move to a move destination folder.
7 Press soft key [MOVE].
- 104 -

117. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
NOTE
1 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source
folder and move destination folder.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
MOVE (new specification)
Only one file
One file can be moved.
1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [CUT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
2 Move to a move destination folder.
3 Press soft key [PASTE].
To rename and move the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key
[PASTE].
Selecting a range
Multiple files can be moved.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [RANGE SELECTT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be moved.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [CUT].
5 Move to a move destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files can be moved.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [SELECTT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [CUT].
5 Move to a move destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].
NOTE
1 Move operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 With move operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a
folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s)
are moved.
3 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source
folder and move destination folder.
- 105 -

118. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
NOTE
4 Files or folders may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
LIST-DELETE
By using a list file, multiple files in the Data Server can be deleted.
1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
2 Press soft key [LIST-DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
When execution is selected, the files in the Data Server are deleted according to the list file.
NOTE
Files cannot sometimes be deleted depending on the operation status and
protection status.
1.2.2 File Transfer Operation
Files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.
NOTE
If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, ”ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”
PUT
A file can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
2 Press soft key [PUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the host computer under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [PUT].
MPUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.
1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?).
2 Press soft key [MPUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
- 106 -

119. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
LIST-PUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.
1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
2 Press soft key [LIST-PUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the Data Server to the host computer
according to the list file.
1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing
MAIN PROGRM
A selected file can be registered as a main program.
1 Select the EDIT mode or MEM mode.
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be registered as a main program.
3 Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM].
A registered main program can be executed in memory operation or edited.
NOTE
1 No file may be able to be selected, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
2 Only a text file can be selected as a main program.
3 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory
operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode.
4 For a file selected as a main program, other file operations are disabled.
5 For memory operation and editing, refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the
CNC.
M198 SET
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified.
1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling.
2 Press soft key [M198 SET].
NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage
mode.
3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the
next power-on.
- 107 -

120. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
DNC SET
A file used for DNC operation can be selected.
1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation.
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
3 Press soft key [DNC SET].
NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage
mode.
3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after
turning the power off, then on again.
FORE CHANGE / BACK CHANGE
A foreground/background folder can be specified.
1 Move to the folder containing a foreground/background file.
2 Press soft key [FORE CHANGE] or [BACK CHANGE].
1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST
SCREEN
Host computer files can be operated on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.
DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen
- 108 -

121. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
NOTE
A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be
displayed correctly.
Display item
M198 OPE FOLDER
Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling.
DNC OPE FILE
Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed.
DT SERVER FOLDER
Displays the work folder (directory) of the Data Server (memory card).
CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Data Server is selected, "DTSVR_HOST" is
indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.
FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the
Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR HOST].
DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation.
M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling.
DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON
Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
- 109 -

122. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.
GET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server.
MGET
Transfers files from the host computer to the Data Server by specifying a file name with wildcards (*, ?).
BGET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server in binary format. Use this soft key to transfer a
binary-format NC program or data other than an NC program such as NC parameter or tool data.
LIST-GET
Transfers multiple files from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.
READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled
only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.
PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is
enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set
to “5”.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.
NOTE
The operations of soft keys [GET], [MGET], [BGET], and [LIST-GET] are the
target operations of the memory protection key.
This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations
result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed.
For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) of the CNC.
1.3.1 Displaying and Operating the File List
RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.
- 110 -

123. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
NOTE
1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of
the FTP server on the host computer.
2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost
information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason,
the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed
information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform
the file operation.
MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.
1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.
2 Press the MDI key .
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.
1 Move to a new folder to be created.
2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Specifying multiple files
Multiple files or folder can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT START].
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
- 111 -

124. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
DELETE (new specification)
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.
2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].
SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.
1 Enter a desired file name.
2 Press soft key [SEARCH],
- 112 -

125. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed.
1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].
The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.
1.3.2 File Transfer Operation
Files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.
NOTE
If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, ”ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”
GET
An NC program can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
2 Press soft key [GET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [GET].
NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.
MGET
Multiple NC programs can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.
1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?).
2 Press soft key [MGET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.
- 113 -

126. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
BGET
A file can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
2 Press soft key [BGET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [BGET].
NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 When transferring binary format NC programs and NC data such as tool offset
data, be sure to use the binary format.
LIST-GET
Multiple files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.
1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
2 Press soft key [LIST-GET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according
to the list file.
NOTE
Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation
M198 OPE
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified.
1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling.
2 Press soft key [M198 SET].
NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP
mode or buffer mode.
3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the
next power-on.
- 114 -

127. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
DNC OPE
A file used for DNC operation can be selected.
1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation.
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
3 Press soft key [DNC SET].
NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP
mode or buffer mode.
3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after
turning the power off, then on again.
1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL
If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an
NC program in the Data Server.
If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC
program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, an M198-based
subprogram call can be made using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.
NOTE
1 An M198-based subprogram call cannot be executed simultaneously with NC
program input, NC program output, and DNC operation.
2 In an M198-based subprogram call, no additional M198-baesd subprogram call
can be made.
3 M198-based subprogram calls do not allow use of file names. Use a program
number to make an M198-based call.
Subprogram call in the storage mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
Subprogram call in the FTP mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
- 115 -

128. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
Subprogram call in the buffer mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
1.5 DNC OPERATION
If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program
in the Data Server.
If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in
the host computer.
If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program of
the buffer mode format in the host computer.
NOTE
A DNC operation cannot be executed simultaneously with NC program input, NC
program output, and M198-based subprogram call.
DNC operation in the storage mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
DNC operation in the FTP mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
DNC operation in the buffer mode
Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT
When the Data Server mode is the storage mode, NC programs on the Data Server can be input to part
program storage of the CNC.
When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs on the host computer can be input to part
program storage of the CNC.
When the Data Server mode is the buffer mode, buffer mode format NC programs on the host computer
can be input to part program storage of the CNC.
- 116 -

129. 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
CAUTION
If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in part program
storage, the existing NC program is overwritten.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output,
M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.
Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the Data Server, and press soft key [F
SET].
When the file name on the Data Server is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default.
5 To rename the input file and input it into part program storage, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [P SET].
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE
In the buffer mode, a file specified with soft key [F SET] is treated as a file list.
Therefore, NC program input processing is performed on the assumption that
files defined in the file list are a continuous file image.
1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT
When the Data Server mode is the storage mode or buffer mode, NC programs in part program storage of
the CNC can be output to the Data Server.
When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be
output to the host computer.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input,
M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.
Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in part program storage, and press soft key
[P SET].
When a specific file name in part program storage is not set, all files in the foreground folder are
assumed to be output.
- 117 -

130. 1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
5 To rename the output file and output it to the Data Server, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [F SET].
When only a file in part program storage is specified, but no file name on the Data Server is
specified, a file is created with the file name used in part program storage.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE
1 When neither file in part program storage nor file name on the Data Server is
specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name
"ALL-PROG.TXT" to the Data Server.
2 When an NC program is output in the storage mode or buffer mode, if a file with
the same name is already present on the memory card of the Data Server, an
error occurs.
1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS
The FTP server functions allow communication with FTP clients on the host computer.
NOTE
1 Up to five FTP clients can be connected to the FTP server. Some FTP client
software products may attempt to internally connect the FTP server as two or
more FTP clients, however. For this reason, the number of FTP clients actually
connected may differ from that of FTP client applications that can be connected.
If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to
ten FTP clients.
For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER
Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
2 On the memory card on the Data Server, text files and binary files are
distinguished from each other. You can specify text (ASCII) or binary (image)
when transferring a file from the FTP client to use the file as a text or binary file.
The file attribute can be fixed to text or binary regardless of which is specified
from the FTP client according to the setting of NC parameter No. 929. For
details, see Section 2.2, “RELATED NC PARAMETERS” in Part III, “SETTING”.
3 The creation date and time of a folder are not managed in the Data Server. For
this reason, the creation date and time of a folder in folder information obtained
from a personal computer are January 1, 2000.
4 Since the file size is managed in units of 500 bytes on the memory card on the
Data Server, the file size in units of 500 bytes can be obtained from a personal
computer.
- 118 -

131. 2.OPERATING THE MACHINE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the machine remote diagnosis functions.
2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
SCREEN
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.
Machine remote diagnosis screen
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.
Display item
INQUIRY NUMBER
Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1,"
"INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."
INQUIRY
Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
RMT DIAG STATUS
Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.
RMT DIAG TIME
Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE
CLOSING," or "ERROR."
- 119 -

132. 2. OPERATING THE MACHINE
REMOTE DIAGNOSIS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."
RECEIPT NUMBER
Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
ERROR NUMBER
Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
AVAILABLE DEVICE
Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can
operate.
ERROR MESSAGE
Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis
functions.
Operation list
DIAG OPEN
Starts machine remote diagnosis.
DIAG CLOSE
Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.
INQUIRY1
Selects inquiry destination 1.
INQUIRY2
Selects inquiry destination 2.
INQUIRY3
Selects inquiry destination 3.
2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination
Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1.
3 Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to
select inquiry destination 3.
2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis
Start diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to start diagnosis.
2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status
Status Description
--- No operation
OPEN [DIAG OPEN] was pressed.
An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
OPENING
server.
- 120 -

133. 2.OPERATING THE MACHINE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
Status Description
ACCEPTED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis.
REFUSED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis.
This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the communication
DIAGNOSING
line.
CLOSE The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis.
[DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced termination
FORCE CLOSING
processing, "---" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field.
ERROR An error occurred on the communication line.
2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
1 Diagnosis is busy [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis.
The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be
2 Router isn’t alive off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power
to the router is on.
The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be
invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be
Receipt Server isn’t
3 operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
alive
accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server is operating.
A system error occurred.
4 System error
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Invalid Inquiry A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination.
5
number. Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set.
6 Invalid IP Address Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.
A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number.
7 Invalid PORT number
Check whether the correct port number is set.
Invalid Router IP Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification
8
Address format.
A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below.
Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the
personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical
9 Socket error
communication path was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer with which to
communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC.
11 Invalid Request
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
An unrecognizable packet was received.
12 Invalid Packet
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Diagnosis was [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis.
13
already stopped
An attempt to receive data failed.
17 Receive error
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped.
19 HeartBeat timeout
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote
20 HeartBeat error diagnosis.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
- 121 -

134. 2. OPERATING THE MACHINE
REMOTE DIAGNOSIS OPERATION B-64014EN/04
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server using the DNS function.
22 DNS error The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS
server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid
and whether the power to the DNS server is on.
2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis
Forcibly terminate diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.
- 122 -

135. 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER
FUNCTION
This chapter describes how to operate the FTP File Transfer function.
On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected
via the embedded Ethernet or host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board can be handled by
selecting a device.
Series 30 i - A
CNC memory
Memory card
Via embedded Ethernet
File list
Without
Me mory Card
PROGRAM FOLDER screen FAST Ethernet Via FAST Ethernet
Board Board
File list
In this manual, the method of handling files on the host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board is
described.
NOTE
The FTP file transfer function cannot perform an M198-based subprogram call or
DNC operation. To perform it, use the Data Server functions.
- 123 -

136. 3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/04
3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys,
press the continue key.)
PROGRAM FOLDER screen
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable
devices.
4 When you press soft key [FTP HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER
screen is changed to the contents (FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of
the host computer to enable file operation.
- 124 -

137. 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN
Host computer files can be operated on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.
FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen
NOTE
A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be
displayed correctly.
Display item
CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of programs in the current folder.
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Fast Ethernet board is selected, "FTP_HOST" is
indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.
FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.
- 125 -

138. 3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/04
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the
Fast Ethernet board, press soft key [FTP HOST].
DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON
Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.
READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to input
NC programs in the host computer to program memory of the CNC.
PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to output
NC programs in program memory of the CNC to the host computer.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.
3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List
RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.
NOTE
1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of
the FTP server on the host computer.
- 126 -

139. 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
NOTE
2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost
information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason,
the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed
information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform
the file operation.
MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.
1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.
2 Press the MDI key .
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.
1 Move to a new folder to be created.
2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Specifying multiple files
Multiple files or folder can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT START].
2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
- 127 -

140. 3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/04
DELETE (new specification)
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.
1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.
1 Press soft key [SELECT].
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.
1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.
2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].
SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.
1 Enter a desired file name.
2 Press soft key [SEARCH],
- 128 -

141. 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/04 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed.
1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].
The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.
3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT
NC programs in the host computer can be input to program memory of the CNC.
CAUTION
If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program
memory, the existing NC program is overwritten.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.
Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST
screen.
3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the host computer, and press soft key [F
SET]. When the file name on the host computer is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by
default.
5 To rename the input file and input it into program memory, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [P SET].
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT
NC programs in program memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.
Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST
screen.
3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
- 129 -

142. 3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/04
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in program memory, and press soft key [P
SET].
When a specific file name in program memory is not set, all files in the foreground folder are
assumed to be output.
5 To rename the output file and output it to the host computer, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [F SET].
When only a file in program memory is specified, but no file name on the host computer is specified,
a file is created with the file name used in program memory.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE
When neither file in program memory nor file name on the host computer is
specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name
"ALL-PROG.TXT" to the host computer.
- 130 -

143. V. CONNECTION

145. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING
1 SETTING
This chapter provides information required to install the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A
1.1.1 Specifications
Ordering information of optional board A02B-0303-J146
Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0030
Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i-A
NOTE
1 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental
condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed.
2 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the
contents on the memory card may be destroyed as a result of a operation
mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off
while accessing the memory card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the
data on the memory card is backed up at all times.
The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the
amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.
Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server
Fast Ethernet board only 6W 6W
Memory card - 0.3 W (Note)
Total 6W 6.3 W
NOTE
The amount of heat output by the memory card may vary, depending on the
employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications,
and so forth.
1.1.2 Installation
This section provides information relating to the installation of the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server.
1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit
The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is
imposed on installation in the optional slot.
- 133 -

146. 1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
Optional board
NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before
installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional
slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.
2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.
1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit
The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction
is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before
installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional
slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.
2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.
- 134 -

147. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING
1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram
Fast Ethernet/
Fast Data Server
Memory card
CNH6
CD38R
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
HUB
4
5
6 RX-
7
8
1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card
The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of
the Fast Data Server.
Specification Capacity Remarks
A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card
For adapters that convert data on the above Compact Flash cards to that for an ATA card, the operation of
the following adapters has been confirmed: FANUC adapter A02B-0236-K150 and Sandisk adapters
SDCF-31-03 and SDAD-38-J60.
NOTE
1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.
Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a
memory card.
2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.
- 135 -

148. 1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
Installing a memory card
1 Remove the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the stopper plate.
(1)
(3)
(2)
2 Remove the stopper plate, then insert the memory card into the connector.
MEMORY
Card
3 Secure the memory card with the stopper plate and tighten the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the
stopper plate.
(4)
MEMORY
Card
(5)
- 136 -

149. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
1.2.1 Specifications
In case of using the Ethernet function, specify the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet
(LCD-mounted type CNC) or the Fast Ethernet board.
In case of using the Data Server function, specify the Fast Ethernet board.
Ordering information of optional board A02B-0323-J147
Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0770
Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
NOTE
1 Refer to the order list of each CNC, for ordering information for Multi-function
Ethernet.
2 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental
condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed.
3 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the
contents on the Compact Flash card may be destroyed as a result of a operation
mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off
while accessing the Compact Flash card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that
the data on the Compact Flash card is backed up at all times.
The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the
amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.
Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server
Fast Ethernet board only 3W 3W
Compact Flash card － 0.3W (Note 2)
Total 3W 3.3W
NOTE
1 For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD mounted type CNC), refer
to the CONNECTION MANUAL of the CNC.
2 The amount of heat output by the Compact Flash card may vary, depending on
the employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card
specifications, and so forth.
- 137 -

150. 1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
1.2.2 Installation
1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit
For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet, the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server are installed on
the main board.
Rear of unit
Multi-function Ethernet
The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is
imposed on installation in the optional slot.
Optional board
NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58
before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the
optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.
2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash
card.
It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA
card (A02B-0236-K150).
3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.
- 138 -

151. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING
1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit
The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction
is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58
before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the
optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.
2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash
card.
It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA
card (A02B-0236-K150).
3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.
- 139 -

152. 1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram
Fast Ethernet/
Fast Data Server
Compact Flash
CD58 card
CD38
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+ HUB
4
5
6 RX-
7
8
1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card
The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of
the Fast Data Server.
Specification Capacity Remarks
A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card
NOTE
1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.
Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a
memory card.
2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.
- 140 -

153. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING
Installing a Compact Flash card
1 Remove the cover (put up the tip of cover), as shown below.
CD58
2 Insert the Compact Flash card to CD58.
CD58
Flash card
Compact
3 The cover is matched to the guide and set on. As a result, the Compact Flash card is fixed.
Guide
CD58
Guide
- 141 -

154. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
2 CABLE CONNECTION
This section describes information relating to the physical Ethernet connection.
CAUTION
1 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable to or from the Fast Ethernet/Fast
Data Server, make sure that the power to the CNC is turned off.
2 Please inquire of each manufacturer about the construction of network or the
condition of using the equipment except the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server
(hub, transceiver, cable etc.). When configuring your network, you must take
other sources of electrical noise into consideration to prevent your network from
being influenced by electrical noise. Make sure that network wiring is sufficiently
separated from power lines and other sources of electrical noise such as motors,
and ground each of the devices as necessary. Also, a high and insufficient
ground impedance may cause interference during communications. After
installing the machine, conduct a communications test before you actually start
operating the machine.
We cannot ensure operation that is influenced by network trouble caused by a
device other than the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server.
2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet
The Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server is provided with a 100BASE-TX interface.
Prepare a hub for connecting the Fast Ethernet board to the Ethernet trunk. The following shows an
example of a general connection.
Some devices (hub, transceiver, etc.) that are needed for building a network do not come in a dust-proof
construction. Using such devices in an atmosphere where they are subjected to dust or oil mist will
interfere with communications or damage the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server. Be sure to install such
devices in a dust-proof cabinet.
- 142 -

155. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
HUB
:
:
:
Twisted pair
cable
CNC
Fast
Ethernet or
Fast Data
Server
Max. 100m
NOTE
1 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
2 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details
of clamping, see Subsection 2.5.2, “Cable Clamp and Shield Processing”. The
clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
3 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not
dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an
atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.
- 143 -

156. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE
(1) LCD-mounted type
Select the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet or optional board. For the location of the
connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1, “Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.
Optional board
(CD38R)
Twisted-pair cable
The radius of the cable
must be 70 mm or more.
Clamp
Ground plate Control unit with
Multi-function Ethernet
(CD38B)
(2) Stand-alone type
Select the optional board. For the location of the connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1,
“Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.
The radius of the cable
must be 70 mm or more.
Twisted-pair cable
Clamp
Ground plate
2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Send +
2 TX- Send -
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX- Receive -
7 Not used
8 Not used
- 144 -

157. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION
2.4.1 Cable Connection
The cable used for connection between the 100BASE-TX interface, CD38R, of the Ethernet board/Data
Server board and the hub is connected as follows:
Ethernet board
/ Data Server board HUB
CD38
1 TX+ RJ-45 1 TX+
2 TX- modular connector 2 TX-
3 RX+ 3 RX+
4 4
5 5
6 RX- 6 RX-
7 7
8 MAX.100m 8
TX+ (1) (1) TX+
TX- (2) (2) TX-
RX+ (3) (3) RX+
RX- (6) (6) RX-
Shielded cable
• Keep the total cable length within 100 m.
Do not extend the cable more than is necessary.
• The figure above shows the cable connection when cables are crossed in the hub.
"X" is usually indicated at the port of the hub to signify that cables are crossed in the hub.
Ethernet board / HUB
Data Server board Cross-connected
X cables
1 TX+ TX+ 1
2 TX- TX- 2
3 RX+ RX+ 3
6 RX- RX- 6
2.4.2 Cable Materials
CAUTION
Unshielded cable (UTP cable) is commercially available as 100BASE-TX
twisted-pair cable: You should, however, use shielded Category 5 twisted-pair
cable (STP cable) to improve the resistance to electrical noise in an FA
environment.
Recommended cables
Manufacturer Specification Remarks
FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. DTS5087C-4P Twisted-pair cable
- 145 -

158. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
Manufacturer Specification Remarks
NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. F-4PFWMF Single-conductor cable
Inquiries
Manufacturer Contact address
FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 2-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku. Tokyo 100-8322
Sales Headquarters TEL: 03-3286-3126 FAX: 03-3286-3979
Remarks
NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 3F MU Bldg., 1-9-1 Minami-narise,
Machida Branch Machida City, Tokyo 194-0045
TEL: 0427-29-2531 FAX: 0427-29-3375
Overseas Sales Office IWATANI International Corporation
Tokyo Head Office
21-8 Nishi-shinbashi 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO,
105-8458, JAPAN
TEL: 03-5405-5810 FAX: 03-5405-5666
Telex: 2524256 IWATYO J
Remarks A finished cable with connectors at both ends can be
offered.
NOTE
The above recommended cables cannot be connected to moving parts.
Recommended cable (for movable parts)
Manufacturer Specification Remarks
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Dedicated to
Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. FNC-118 FANUC
Specification
• Electric characteristics:
Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5.
From the viewpoint of attenuation performance, ensure that the length to the hub is 50 m or less.
• Structure:
Group shielded (braided shield). A drain wire is available.
The conductor is an AWG26 annealed copper twisted wire, with a sheath thickness of 0.8 mm and
an outer diameter of 6.7 mm ±0.3 mm.
• Fire retardancy
UL1581 VW-1
• Oil resistance
Conforms to the FANUC internal standards (equivalent to the conventional oil-resistant electric
cables).
• Flexing resistance:
1,000,000 times or more with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped flex test)
• UL style No.
AWM 20276 (80°C/30V/VW-1)
NOTE
Be sure to use the connector TM21CP-88P(03) manufactured by HIROSE
ELECTRIC CO., LTD. for this cable.
- 146 -

159. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
Inquiries
Manufacturer Contact address
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Nagano Sales Office TEL:0266-27-1597
Remarks
Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Tokyo Sales Office TEL:03-3492-0073
Remarks
Cable assembly
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can also supply the cable assembly mentioned above.
Contact Oki Electric directly to determine the specifications (length, factory test, packing, and so
forth) for purchase.
2.4.3 Connector Specification
Use an 8-pin modular connector (RJ-45) with the twisted-pair cable for the Ethernet connection. The
following connectors or equivalents must be used.
For general use Specification Manufacturer Remarks
Solid wire 5-569530-3 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K..
Special tools
Solid wire MS8-RSZT-EMC SK KOHKI CO., LTD.
required
Twisted-pair cable 5-569552-3 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K..
HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., Special tools
Twisted-pair cable TM11AP-88P
LTD. required
For movable parts Specification Manufacturer Remarks
For cable AWG26 4P HIROSE ELECTRIC
TM21CP-88P(03) Note
TPMC-C5-F(SB) or FNC-118 CO., LTD.
NOTE
Information about TM21CP-88P(03):
Connector (standard product of the manufacturer)
Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P
Manufacturer: HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Manufacturer type number: TM21CP-88P(03)
Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5.
For assembly with a cable, contact HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. directly.
(From HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD., "TM21CP-88P(03) Connection Procedure
Manual (Technical Specification No. ATAD-E2367)" is available as a technical
document.)
- 147 -

160. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES
2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines
For signal line separation, refer to the description of noise protection in the Connection Manual
(Hardware) of CNC. The wiring for the Ethernet cable is of group C.
2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables
Clamp an Ethernet twisted pair cable according to the method described below, as with cables that need
to be shielded. Clamping cables provides support and shielding and is extremely important to the safe
operation of the system. Never overlook cable clamping.
Peel off part of the jacket as shown in the figure to expose the outer coating of the shield, and press this outer
coating against the ground plate with the clamp fixture.
The machine manufacturer must prepare the ground plate and install it as follows:
Ground plate
Cable
Cable clamp
Ground plate
Shield
Peel off jacket
NOTE
To ensure the safe operation of the system, clamp and shield the cables.
Connect the Ethernet board and hub with a twisted-pair cable. Shield the cable with clamp fixtures.
This shielding is extremely important to the stable operation of the system. Be sure to shield the cable.
Shield both ends of each cable at locations as nearest to the CNC and hub connectors as possible. When
the CNC and hub are contained in the same power magnetics cabinet and the cable is short, shield the
cable only at the hub side.
- 148 -

161. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
Power magnetics cabinet Power magnetics cabinet
Control unit Control unit
Twisted-pair
cable
HUB
Shielding
Example of shielding of transceiver cable
(When LCD-mounted type Series 30i-A)
Prepare the following earth plate.
Mounting screw hole
Ground terminal
(used for grounding)
Clamp fixture
mounting hole
Use a nickel-plated iron plate at least 2 mm thick as the ground plate.
8mm Ground plate
12mm
20mm
Details of clamp fixture mounting holes
- 149 -

162. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
55mm max.
28mm
6mm
17mm
External dimensions of clamp fixture
2.5.3 Grounding the Network
Even if the grounding condition on the machine side is satisfied, the communication line can pick up
noise from the machine, depending on the machine installation condition and environment, thus resulting
in a communication error. To protect against such noise, the machine should be separated and insulated
from the Ethernet trunk cable and personal computer. Examples of connection are given below.
Personal computer
Switching HUB
Note 2
Note 1
Hub power supply
Note 2 Note 2
Personal computer / HUB HUB
HUB side
Electrically separated
by 100BASE-TX cable STP cable STP
connection cable
Machine system
Ethernet Machine Machine
Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
Machine
Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
Large-Scale Network
- 150 -

163. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
Personal computer
Hub power supply
Note 2
HUB
Note 1
Note 1
Personal computer/Ethernet trunk side
Electrically separated
by 100BASE-TX STP cable
cable connection
Machine system
Ethernet
Note 1
Machine
Note 1
Small-Scale Network
NOTE
1 The ground between PC/HUB side and machine system side must be separated.
If it is impossible to separate the ground because there is only one grounding
point, connect the ground cable for each system to the grounding point
independently. (See figure below.)
The resistance for grounding must be less than 100-ohm (Class D). The
thickness of the ground cable is the same as the thickness of AC power cable or
more. At least thickness of 5.5mm2 is necessary.
2 Note that the number of allowable hub-to-hub connections depends on the type
of hub.
3 There is possibility that noise makes the obstacle of communication even if the
ground is separated using the 100BASE-TX. In the case of using the Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data Server under the worst environment, please separate
between the PC/Trunk line side and machine system side completely using the
100BASE-FX (Optical fiber media).
- 151 -

164. 2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04
FG
Note 2
HUB
Ground wire on personal
computer and trunk sides
Ground wire on
machine system
Machine
Ground wire on machine system
Ground point
Wiring on a single ground point
2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION
The following table lists check items at installation.
Check item Description Check
Ethernet cable
Use cables which satisfies all the following conditions:
1) With shielding
Type
2) Twisted-pair cable
3) Category 5
The cable length shall be within 100 m (50 m for a movable cable recommended
Length
by FANUC).
For a twisted-pair cable, the following pins shall be paired:
Connection 1) Pin No. 1 (TX+) – pin No. 2 (TX-)
2) Pin No. 3 (RX+) – pin No. 6 (RX-)
The Ethernet cables shall be bound separately from the following cables or
covered with an electromagnetic shield:
Separation
1) Group A: AC power lines, power lines for motors, and others
2) Group B: Current DC (24 VDC) and others
For a shielded cable, the part of which outer coating is peeled off and exposed
Shielding
shall be fixed to the ground plate with a clamp fixture.
The ground plate shall be located as nearest to the CNC as possible (to make the
Clamping
cable between the ground plate and CNC hard to be affected by noise).
Connectors Any cable connector shall not be pulled (to prevent poor contact of the connector).
Wiring No cable shall be laid under a heavy object.
The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the
Bending radius
cable.
For movable
For a movable part, a cable for a movable part shall be used.
part
- 152 -

165. B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
Check item Description Check
CNC and cabinet
The CNC ground (frame ground) shall be connected properly and the length of the
CNC grounding
ground wire shall be within 300 mm.
Ground plate The ground plate shall be connected to the AC ground of the cabinet with wire.
Mounting The optional board shall be inserted in a CNC slot properly.
HUB
The "cautions on use" of the hub shall be observed (A terminating resistor shall be
Use conditions
mounted properly if required).
Grounding The hub shall be grounded.
Cabinet The hub shall be installed in an enclosed cabinet.
Vibration The hub shall be installed so that it is not affected by vibration.
The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the
Bending radius
cable.
- 153 -

167. VI. MAINTENANCE

169. 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
This chapter provides hardware maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A
1.1.1 Component Layout
LSI
MPU
CNH6
CD38R
Name PCB drawing No. Remarks
Fast Ethernet board /
A20B-8101-0030
Fast Data Server board
- 157 -

170. 1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings
The optional board provides four green LEDs (STATUS) and one red LED (ALARM) for status
indication, and provides three green LEDs and one red LED for communication status indication. The
figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows:
: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care
CD38R
ALR (RED)
COM (YELLOW)
LIL (GREEN)
COL (RED)
BTX (GREEN)
4(STASUS) (GREEN)
3(STATUS) (GREEN)
2(STATUS) (GREEN)
1(STATUS) (GREEN)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.
LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Immediately after power-on one of the following:
→ The software is not stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC.
→ The optional board is defective.
The optional board has started.
Start of optional board If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional
board may be defective.
The software has been downloaded to the optional board.
Completion of software
If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional
downloading
board may be defective.
The software OS has started.
If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
one of the following:
Firmware OS started.
→ The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is
destroyed.
→ The optional board is defective.
- 158 -

171. 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Initialization of the software OS is completed.
If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Completion of software OS one of the following:
initialization → The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is
destroyed.
→ The optional board is defective.
The Ethernet parameters have been read.
If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Completion of parameter
one of the following:
reading
→ The Ethernet option or Data Server option is not installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
Start completion The optional board has started normally.
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Normal status The board is operating normally.
LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning
100BASE-TX connection in
BTX The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
progress
10BASE-T connection in
BTX The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
progress
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
Transmission/
COM Data is being transmitted or received.
reception in progress
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time and short on-time.
LED display LED display
[Long [Short
Status Description
on-time] on-time]
4321 4321
A defect on another board or a problem on another
Error on another board
optional board was detected.
Software has a problem, or the optional board is
Bus error
defective.
Parity alarm The optional board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or the optional board is
instruction defective.
Software has a problem, or the optional board is
Illegal slot instruction
defective.
Software has a problem, or the optional board is
CPU address error
defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and short
on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
- 159 -

172. 1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED display Status Description
The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the
COL ■ Collision occurs.
Ethernet communication traffic (communication
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.)
amount) is high or ambient noise is high.
The board is not connected to the hub properly. The
LIL LED stays off also when the power to the hub is
LIL □ Not connected to hub off.
Check whether the board is connected to the hub
properly.
A parity error occurred in memory on the optional
ALM ■ Parity error occurs.
board. The optional board is defective.
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
1.2.1 Component Layout
Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)
CD58
CD38R
Name PCB drawing No. Remarks
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0770
- 160 -

173. 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)
Rear of unit
CD38B
1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings
The board provides one green LED (STATUSF) and one yellow LED (LCOM) for status indication, and
two red LEDs (HER, COL).
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting state.
Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)
CD38R
HER (red)
LCOM (yellow)
STATUSF (green)
COL (red)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.
- 161 -

174. 1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)
Rear of unit
Ethernet (Multi-function Ethernet)
StatusLED
STATUSF
LCOM
HER
COL
(red) (yellow) (green) (red)
- 162 -

175. 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows:
: Off : On : Blinking
LED display transition for STATUSF (during power-on)
LED
Status Meaning
display
□ Power-off
■ Immediately after power-on Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the
following:
→ The CNC communication software may not be running normally.
Check whether the communication software is installed properly.
→ The hardware may be faulty. Replace the optional board (main
board when Multi-function Ethernet is used).
☆ Start completion The board has started normally.
LED display for STATUSF (during normal operation)
LED
Status Meaning
display
☆ Normal status The board is operating normally.
LED display for LCOM
LED
Status Meaning
display
□ Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub properly.
The LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly.
■ Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
☆ Transmission/reception in Data is being transmitted or received.
progress
LED display for COL
LED
Status Meaning
display
□ Normal status The board is operating normally.
■ Collision occurs. The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet
☆ (Data collision occurs.) communication traffic (communication amount) is high or ambient
noise is high.
LED display for HER
LED
Status Meaning
display
□ Normal status The board is operating normally.
■ Error detected in the Ethernet The cause may be the faulty optional board (main board when
circuit on the main board or option Multi-function Ethernet is used) or a malfunction due to noise.
board.
☆ Error detected in the software
- 163 -

176. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
This chapter provides software maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
2.1 Ethernet LOG
A log related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed.
ETHERNET LOG screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the LOG
screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous
menu key.)
LOG screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the
occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format
"MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hours, mm
represents minutes, and ss represents seconds.
The top item in the example above indicates "09:36:14 on August 7".
To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
By operating the LOG screen of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, log information can be displayed for
each function.
- 164 -

177. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
(1) Soft key [ALL]
This soft key displays all log information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
This soft key displays log information related to the parameter setting and basic communication
function of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
This soft key displays log information related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [DATA SERVER]
This soft key displays log information related to the Data Server.
(5) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG]
This soft key displays log information related to the machine remote diagnosis functions.
NOTE
The Ethernet log information is stored in volatile memory and is lost when the
power to the CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.
Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0118 Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error occurred due to one of the
E-0119 following causes:
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be
received from the personal computer with which to
communicate, and the logical communication path
was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer
with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the
logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All FOCAS2/Ethernet communication paths are being
used.
E-0126 No response from RMT DIAG server The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server may be invalid or the power to the
machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off.
Check whether the IP address of the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the
power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server is on.
Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server may not respond to the PING command to
increase the security level (such as a firewall setting).
Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to "1" and connect
the server again.
E-012D No response from router The IP address of the router may be invalid or the
power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP
address of the router is valid and whether the power to
the router is on.
- 165 -

178. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is
Message received, the save of parameters for the Unsolicited
Messaging function failed due to one of the following
causes:
→ The mode of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t
“PC MODE”.
→ The status of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t
“Not Ready”.
→The wrong value exists in the argument “the
parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging” of the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.
E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”,
Message is wrong “cnc_rdunsolicprm2” or “cnc_unsolicstart” is received, it
is detected that the argument “the parameter number of
the Unsolicited Messaging” is wrong.
E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent from the FTP server is displayed as is.
A message containing kanji, hiragana, and/or katakana
characters may not be displayed correctly.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server The FTP server software may not be running. Run the
FTP server software.
Alternatively, the setting may be made so that the FTP
server cannot be connected to increase the security
level (such as a firewall setting). Change the firewall
setting so that the FTP server can be connected.
E-0207 The router is not found The IP address of the router may be invalid or the
power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP
address of the router is valid and whether the power to
the router is on.
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The IP address of the FTP server may be invalid or the
power to the FTP server may be off. Check whether the
IP address of the FTP server is valid and whether the
power to the FTP server is on.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to
"1" and connect the server again.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check the user name and password for logging in to the
FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check the user name and password for logging in to the
FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder for logging in to the FTP server.
E-0219 The DNC file is not found Check whether the file for DNC operation is specified
correctly.
E-021A The specified file is not found Check whether the specified file is present.
E-021B Opening a file failed The file could not be opened.
Check the error code in parentheses.
E-021F FTP transfer is busy on BUFFER mode FTP communication could not catch up with data
supply.
Correct the file division size. Alternatively, set bit 0 of
NC parameter No. 0904 to 1.
E-0220 There is no file in list file No file is defined in the list in the buffer mode. Correct
the file list.
E-0221 The specified file already exists The specified file is already present on the memory card
of the Data Server. Delete the existing file. Alternatively,
change the file name.
- 166 -

179. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0223 Writing data to the file failed Data could not be written to the memory card of the
Data Server. Check the error code in parentheses.
E-023A The specified file is busy The file on the memory card of the Data Server is
currently used.
When a file on the memory card is selected as a main
program, the file is regarded as being used.
E-0252 Contents of ATA card are broken Format the memory card of the Data Server.
E-02F0 ATA card is not found Check whether a memory card is installed in the Data
Server.
E-02F3 ATA card is not mounted Check whether the memory card of the Data Server is
destroyed and whether the memory card has been
formatted.
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error occurred due to one of the
following causes:
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be
received from the personal computer with which to
communicate, and the logical communication path
was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer
with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the
logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
→ Data cannot be posted to the communication
destination due to a firewall setting.
E-0A02 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address may not be written on the Fast
Ethernet board or Fast Data Server board or the board
may be damaged.
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data flows over the network.
Take action such as dividing the network.
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Set the IP address.
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Set the subnet mask according to the subnet mask
specification format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Set the subnet mask.
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local
node and router IP addresses.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local
node and DNS server IP addresses.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check the host name setting.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check the domain name setting.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B0C Port number of a remote FTP server is A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
wrong
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be
used.
E-0B10 Port number of own FTP server is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B11 User name of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used.
E-0B12 Password of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used.
- 167 -

180. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0B13 Login folder of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be
used.
E-0B14 IP address of Remote Diag is wrong Set the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B15 Port number of Remote Diag is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To set the item, disable the DHCP client function.
E-0B27 Unsolicited Message isn't available The software conditions to use the Unsolicited
Messaging function are not satisfied. Refer to Chapter
6, ”UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part II,
“SPECIFICATION”.
E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” can't be
execute in “CNC MODE”.
E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The application of parameters for the Unsolicited
Messaging function failed because the status of the
Unsolicited Messaging function is not “Not Ready”.
This error occurred due to one of the following causes
when the status is not “Not Ready”:
→ The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”, or
“cnc_unsolicstart” is executed.
→ The soft key [APPLY] is pressed.
E-0B2B Cannot refresh param of Unsolicited The application of parameters for the Unsolicited
Message Messaging function failed due to one of the following
causes:
→ The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred.
→ The invalid value exists in the parameters for the
Unsolicited Messaging function.
E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission The non-effective value exists in “TRANSMISSION
parameter of Unsolicited Message NUMBER” or “TRANSMISSION PARAMETER
(NO.1-3)”.
E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of The total transmission size of the parameters for the
Unsolicited Message exceeds the limitation Unsolicited Messaging function exceeds the available
maximum size. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting by
CNC screen” in Part III, “SETTING” for the available
maximum size.
E-XXXX (No message) Internal error.
Report the error number.
The meaning of the error codes indicated in error messages E-02XX are as follows:
Error code Meaning
2 The available space of the memory card of the Data Server is insufficient.
10 The specified folder cannot be found.
11 The allowable number of entries is exceeded.
12 Access to a folder was rejected.
14 The specified file cannot be found.
15 Access to a file was rejected.
19 An attempt was made to access a file being used.
22 The specified file name is illegal.
28 A TV check error was detected.
36 The specified file is already present.
37 The folder is not empty.
39 The specified folder is already present.
48 The available file size is exceeded.
- 168 -

181. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION
By transmitting the PING command, the CNC can check that a connection is made with the
communication destination.
PING screen (connection state confirmation)
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the
soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [PING].
PING (CONNECT STATE) screen
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING FTP1] to send the PING command to host 1 to which
the Data Server function is connected. Similarly, press soft key [PING FTP2] and soft key [PING
FTP3] to send the PING command to connection hosts 2 and 3, respectively.
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING RMT1] to send the PING command to inquiry
destination 1 of the machine remote diagnosis functions. Similarly, press soft key [PING RMT2] to
send the command to inquiry destination 2 and soft key [PING RMT3] to inquiry destination 3.
- 169 -

182. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
The results of PING execution are as follows:
Execution results of PING
PING (SETTING) screen
Procedure
1 When sending the PING command to a desired destination, enter the destination address in
HOSTNAME (IP ADDRESS) on the PING (SETTING) screen. Moreover, set a desired execution
repeat value in REPEAT.
PING (SETTING) screen
2 After entering a host name (IP address) and repeat value, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key
[PING EXEC] to send the PING command to the specified destination.
3 To cancel the transmission of the PING command halfway, press soft key [PING CANCEL].
- 170 -

183. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION
The communication state of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server detected by hardware can be checked.
COM STATE (SEND / RECEIVE) screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the
soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [COM STATE] to display the COM STATE screen.
COM STATE screen
Display item
Display item Description
BAUDRATE Displays the communication rate and mode.
Communication rate: 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps
Communication mode: Full duplex or Half duplex
-------- : Not connected to HUB (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B)
SEND PACKET Displays the number of sent packets.
SEND RETRYOVER Displays the number of errors detected during packet sending.
COLLISION
CARRIER SENSE LOST
NO CARRIER
FRAME LENGTH ERROR
RECEIVE PACKET Displays the number of received packets.
CRC ERROR Displays the number of errors detected during packet reception.
SHORT FRAME
LONG FRAME
ODD FRAME
OVERFLOW
PHY-LSI ERROR
- 171 -

184. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION
The operating status of the software of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server can be checked.
TASK STATE screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the
soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [TASK STATE] to display the TASK STATE
screen.
TASK STATE screen
Display item
The meaning of each symbol is indicated below.
Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked
COMMON W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the basic
D : Data being processed (2) function
E : Start of software
FOCAS2 #0 C : Waiting for connection from the host Operation status of the
W : Data being processed (1) FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
D : Data being processed (2)
N : FOCAS2 incapable of being executed
FOCAS2 #1 W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
X : Not executed yet
FOCAS2 #2 W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
X : Not executed yet
SCREEN W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the CNC screen
D : Data being processed (2) display functions
X : Not executed yet
- 172 -

185. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked
UDP W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the UDP broad
D : Data being processed (2) cast
X : Not executed yet
PMC W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the FANUC
D : Data being processed (2) LADDER-III function
X : Not executed yet
DATASERVER W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the Data Server
D : Data being processed (2) functions
X : Not executed yet
FTP SERVER W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
Number : Number of sockets currently connected
REMOTE DIAG W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the machine
D : Data being processed (2) remote diagnosis functions
X : Not executed yet
UNSOLICITED W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the unsolicited
D : Data being processed (2) messaging function
N : Abnormal state
X : Not executed yet
Number : The existence signals is being transmitted
during this number is being counted.
FTP W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the FTP file
D : Data being processed (2) transfer function
X : Not executed yet
2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE
The state of FTP clients connected to the FTP server can be checked and the FTP connection can be
disconnected forcedly.
NOTE
To use this function, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is
required.
FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST, CLIENT DETAIL)
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the
soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [FTP SERVER] to display the FTP Server
MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST).
- 173 -

186. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)
4 By using cursor keys , select a client, and press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key
[DETAIL] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL) displaying the
client information on the cursor.
The CLIENT DETAIL screen is as follows:
FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL)
5 Press soft key [LIST] to display the CLIENT LIST screen again.
- 174 -

187. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Display item
Item Description
CLIENT Displays the IP address of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. (Example of
display format: "192.168.0.200")
- In the CLIENT DETAIL screen:
When the FTP connection is disconnected, "Disconnected" is displayed.
CONNECT TIME Display the connect time of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. The format
of the time is "hh:mm:ss" (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second).
The time display is updated automatically.
- In the CLIENT DETAIL screen:
When the FTP connection is disconnected, "--:--:--" is displayed.
NOTE
1 The CLIENT DETAIL screen cannot be displayed when any client does not exist
on the CLIENT LIST screen.
2 There is not the CLIENT DETAIL screen for 15-inch display unit.
Operation (DISCONNECT)
The selected client is disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen and the CLIENT DETAIL screen.
1 When the CLIENT LIST screen is displayed, by using cursor keys , select a client to be
disconnected.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DISCONNECT].
3 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect the selected client.
When the CLIENT DETAIL screen is displayed, the displaying client is disconnected.
NOTE
An error occurs if the disconnect operation is attempted to execute when any
client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen, or when the connection with
the client is already disconnected on the CLIENT DETAIL screen.
Operation (ALL DISCONNECT)
All clients are disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [ALL DISCON].
2 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect all clients.
NOTE
1 This operation can be executed only on the CLIENT LIST screen.
2 An error occurs if this operation is attempted to execute when any client does
not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen.
- 175 -

188. 2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04
2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
NOTE
This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.
When using the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following alarms
might be displayed.
In this case, please confirm the diagnosis information and take the countermeasure.
Number Message Description
PW0050 POWER MUST BE OFF (INITIALIZED When the power was turned on, communication
(NOTE) COMMUNICATION) hardware was initialized.
Please turn the power off.
SR2038 WRONG COMMUNICATION COMBINATION The combination of the communication hardware and
the software options is illegal.
Details of an illegal combination are notified to
diagnosis number No.4400 and 4401.
NOTE
An alarm PW0050 might be generated when the power is turned on after the
option boards are added or are exchanged and the software option is changed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 4400 BD4 BD3 BD2 BD1 MFE
When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the detail information of wrong
hardware is indicated.
#0 MFE Multi-function Ethernet
#2 BD1 Option board mounted in slot1
#3 BD2 Option board mounted in slot2
#4 BD3 Option board mounted in slot3
#5 BD4 Option board mounted in slot4
NOTE
When the communication alarm SR2038 does not occur, all bits are
"0".
Diagnosis 4401 Detailed number of alarm SR2038
When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the information is indicated.
Number Description
0 The combination of the communication functions is correct.
1 The number of mounted the hardware option exceeds limitation.
The number of the hardware options that can be mounted is up to three.
2 The hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates doesn't exist.
Confirm the hardware option specified for NC parameter No.970-972.
3 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the working function is not
specified.
NC parameters No.970-972 are wrong though the hardware option exists.
Specify "-1" for No.970-972 When not using it.
4 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the Data Server function and
the FL-net function are specified at the same time. Specify a separate hardware
option for NC parameter No.970, No.971 or 972 because the Data Server function
and the FL-net function are exclusive functions.
- 176 -

189. 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Number Description
5 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is
not effective. The same hardware option is specified for NC parameter No.970,
No.971 or No.972.
6 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is
not effective.
2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION
When the Fast Ethernet function on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is used, Fast Ethernet communication
errors are checked at intervals of 10 seconds. If the number of errors detected during the last 1 minute
reaches the value set for parameter No. 11533, warning signal WETF is output.
Since the number of detected errors is checked at intervals of 10 seconds, the warning signal is also
output at intervals of 10 seconds. The signal output is reset by turning the power off, then on again.
NOTE
1 This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.
2 The maximum value for network error counters is 65535.
If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0.
Parameter
11533 Warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 128
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the number of Fast Ethernet error detection occurrences.
When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal
to the setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
Fast Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETF<F0535.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the Fast
Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533 (standard
setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
- 177 -

191. APPENDIX

193. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING
A TROUBLESHOOTING
This appendix describes troubleshooting related to Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server communication.
A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB
(1) Make sure that the STP cable between the hub and the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected.
(2) Make sure that cables are properly wired.
• Though communication is carried out when the cable pair at the send and receive sides is not
properly mounted, communications errors may occur more frequently.
(3) Make sure that a hub for 100BASE-TX is used.
• A hub for 10BASE-T may be used to perform communication. In this case, however, the
communication speed can decrease.
(4) Make sure that the LIL LED on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is lit at all times.
• The LIL LED will not light if the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is not connected to the hub or
if the hub is not ON.
(5) Make sure that the LED (LINK indicator LED) on the connected hub is lit at all times.
• Some hubs do not have a LINK indicator LED.
• The LINK indicator LED will not light if the hub is not connected to the Fast Ethernet/Fast
Data Server or the CNC is not ON.
(6) Make sure that a hub for full duplex communication only is not used.
• The Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server automatically detects the communication speed and
communication mode (full duplex or half duplex) by using the auto negotiation function. In
communication with a hub that does not have the auto negotiation function, the Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data Server recognizes the communication speed correctly but regards the
communication mode as half duplex communication.
As a result, when an attempt is made to communicate with a hub for full duplex communication
only that does not have the auto negotiation function, there is a discrepancy in communication
mode, so correct communication cannot sometimes be performed.
• For details on how to connect, see Part V "CONNECTION."
A.2 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK
General notes are provided below. For network installation, consult with specialized vendors or
manufacturers. Run cables away from noise sources.
The descriptions below are not applicable if the network is configured using only those hubs that have
Ethernet boards connected.
• When the trunk is based on 10BASE-5
(1) Make sure that a transceiver is attached to the trunk correctly.
- If a transceiver is attached correctly, the resistance between the trunk shield and central
conductor is about 25Ω (when a terminating resistor is attached).
- A special tool is required to attach a transceiver. (No special tool is required, depending
on the manufacturer. For details, refer to the installation manual of each transceiver.)
- Do not attach a transceiver again to a point where a transceiver was once attached.
(Otherwise, the cable can be damaged.)
(2) Make sure that transceivers are attached at proper intervals.
- Transceivers must be attached at intervals of 2.5 m or more. It is recommended that
transceivers be attached at intervals of an integral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, marks
indicating installation points are provided on the trunk cable.
- 181 -

194. A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
(3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached.
- A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50Ω)
(4) Make sure that the trunk cable is not longer than 500 m.
(5) Make sure that the cable (transceiver cable) used for connection between a transceiver and the
hub is not longer than a specified limit.
- Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the
maximum allowable length of a cable with a smaller diameter may be shorter than 50 m.
So, check the specifications of each cable.
• When the trunk is based on 10BASE-2
(1) Make sure that the length of each cable is 0.5 m or more.
- The minimum allowable distance between nodes (units) is 0.5 m.
(2) Make sure that the trunk cable length (sum of the lengths of cables) is 185 m or less.
(3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached.
- A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50Ω)
A.3 CHECKING SETTINGS
The following describes how to check the minimum settings needed for communications.
NOTE
For details on IP addresses, subnet mask and other set values, consult with the
network administrator.
• Checking settings on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server
(1) Make sure that the MAC address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed.
- This address is appended to each board before shipment from the factory, and is
automatically displayed in the Setting screen. This address need not be set by the user.
(2) Make sure that the IP address is set.
(3) Make sure that the subnet mask is set.
(4) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.
• Checking settings on the personal computer
(1) Make sure that the IP address is set.
(2) Make sure that the subnet mask is set.
(3) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.
• For details on how to set, see Part III "SETTING."
A.4 CHECKING COMMUNICATION
This section describes how to check the communication status between a CNC and the other
communicating partner (host computer). If communication with the CNC sometimes fails or is not
possible, first make sure that the communication path is normal by the following procedure. The "ping"
command is used to check communication.
In the following example, a host computer running the Windows NT4.0 is used.
• Checking the communication path
Open the DOS window, and enter 'ping "IP address of CNC"'. If a response is returned from the
CNC, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected to the CNC.
(1) When a response is returned (normal connection)
- 182 -

195. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) When a response is not returned (abnormal connection)
When a response is not returned, probable causes are either the hardware connection or a
software setting, or both. Check the hardware connections and software settings again.
• Checking IP addresses for duplication
IP addresses can be checked for duplication by the procedure described below.
(1) Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the CNC to isolate it from the network.
(2) Execute a ping command on another personal computer as described in "• Checking the
communication path."
Since the CNC is disconnected from the network, no response should be returned. If a response
is returned, the IP address is in use on another unit. Therefore, the IP address cannot be used on
the CNC from which the cable was disconnected.
CAUTION
The purpose of this check is to check for a duplicate IP address. It does not
assure that the IP address is left non-duplicated because a unit having the same
IP address may be turned on after the check or the same address may be set
later.
When setting an IP addressing, ask the network manager about duplication.
• Checking for influence of electrical noise
The "ping" command "-t" option is used for checking for the influence of electrical noise. This
option sends ping packets until "Ctrl+C" is pressed.
- 183 -

196. A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
1. About the influence of electrical noise from peripheral machinery (devices)
(1) Turn the CNC is mounted ON to enable communications.
(2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier
OFF, and issue the "ping" command from the host computer.
(3) Count the number of lost packets (packets for which a response was not returned).
If a lost packet occurs in this state, the machine is probably being affected by electrical
influence from peripheral machines.
Countermeasure:
Pin-point the source of the electrical noise, and check the wiring again to prevent
the influence of electrical noise.
2. About the influence of electrical noise from mounted machinery
(1) Start up the machine in the same way as 1 above.
(2) Cancel the emergency stop on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier ON, and issue
the "ping" command from the host computer.
(3) Count the number of lost packets.
If more lost packets than in 1 above are occurring, a probable cause is the influence of
electrical noise on the machine itself. General probable causes are the state of the ground
on the machine or on the communicating party.
Countermeasure:
Check the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party,
and insulate the communications trunk with the machine.
• For the method of checking the operating status and communication status of the Fast Ethernet/Fast
Data Server, see Part VI “MAINTENANCE” as well.
- 184 -

197. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
This appendix describes the method of setting up an FTP server that operates on the host computer to
function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.
NOTE
This appendix provides just setup examples.
The actual setup may differ from these examples depending on the personal
computer environment and other factors. When actually setting up an FTP
server, make proper settings with referencing the personal computer manual
and others.
To use an FTP server in a factory network, consult with the network
administrator of the factory.
B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000
Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000 Professional.
- 185 -

198. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
2. Click [Install Add-On Components].
3. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet
Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].
- 186 -

199. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
4. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next]. The necessary files are
installed.
The installation is completed when the following screen appears:
Setting the Internet Information Service
1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
- 187 -

200. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
2. Double-click [Administrative Tools].
3. Double-click [Internet Service Manager] for activation.
- 188 -

201. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
4. Double-click the computer name. Next, select [Default FTP Site] and right-click to display the menu.
Then, select Properties.
5. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and
[Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.
However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file
is accessible can be determined.
6. Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button.
In [Default FTP Site], the directory named "Inetpubftproot", set in [Local Path] above (in the drive
where Windows 2000 is installed), is assumed to be the home directory. So, directories under this
directory can be accessed.
So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory.
The home directory can be changed by setting the new directory in the [Local Path] of [FTP Site
Directory].
- 189 -

202. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
7. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory, a virtual directory needs to
be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use the online help information of Windows 2000.
Login user setting
1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].
- 190 -

203. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary items such as a user name.
4. Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified user name. (Unless a password is set,
access to the FTP server cannot be made correctly. So, be sure to enter a password.)
- 191 -

204. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted.
The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.
6. Click the [Finish] button. The entered user name is registered, and the user can log in by using the
user name and password.
Stopping password expiration for a login user
If the password expiration is not stopped, when the password expires, login is disabled, preventing FTP
communication.
Therefore, stop the password expiration as necessary.
When a password has expired, it is necessary to set the password again.
1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
- 192 -

205. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab.
- 193 -

206. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Click the [Advanced] button.
5. Double-click [Users]. A list of registered users is displayed.
- 194 -

207. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.
For example, double-click "dtsvr".
7. Check [Password never expires] and then click the [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.
- 195 -

208. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional
(FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
Windows XP Home Edition does not have IIS (Internet Information Service).
Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
2. Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
- 196 -

209. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Double-click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet
Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service].
- 197 -

210. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next].
6. The dialog box above is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
7. The installation is completed when the screen above is displayed.
Setting the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
- 198 -

211. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Click [Performance and Maintenance].
3. Click [Administrative Tools].
- 199 -

212. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Double-click [Internet Information Services].
5. Double-click [FTP Site], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 200 -

213. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet.
Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is
selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format,
whether each file is accessible can be determined.
7. Then, click the [OK] button.
In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory Inetputftproot (on the drive where Windows XP is
installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed.
To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP
Site Directory] mentioned in step 6 above.
8. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 7 above, a
virtual directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows
XP.
- 201 -

214. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Login user setting
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
2. Double-click the icon of [User Accounts].
- 202 -

215. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name.
4. Click the [Next] button, then set an account type.
The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.
- 203 -

216. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
6. For password setting, click the previously created account in [or pick an account to change]. (The
FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
7. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.
- 204 -

217. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
8. Click the [Create Password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.
Stopping password expiration for a login user
If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password.
If you are necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.
1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt].
2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.
3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows XP
Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows XP Professional, the Data
Server cannot communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.
NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.
- 205 -

218. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
2. Click the icon of [Network and Internet Connections].
3. Click the icon [Network Connections].
- 206 -

219. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
4. Right-click the icon [Local Area Connection] to display the menu. Then, select Properties.
5. Select the [Advanced] tab.
6. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is not checked, the Internet Connection Firewall function does not
work. Then, the following confirmations are not necessary.
- 207 -

220. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
7. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is checked, click the [Settings…] button.
8. If the [FTP Server] check-box is not checked, the FTP server function does not work. Check the
[FTP Server] check-box.
When the [FTP Server] check-box is checked, the following window is displayed. Then, click the
[OK] button.
- 208 -

221. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
9. Select the [ICMP] tab.
- 209 -

222. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
10. If the [Allow incoming echo request] check-box is not checked, the Data Server function cannot find
the FTP server at the start of communication.
At the start of communication of Data Server, if the message “[FTP] (IP-address) IS NOT
AVAILABLE” is displayed, check this check-box.
Confirming the firewall function when Windows XP (Service Pack 2) is used
When Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2) is used, a different firewall setting procedure is used.
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
- 210 -

223. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Double-click [Security Center] to start it.
3. Click [Windows Firewall] displayed at the bottom.
- 211 -

224. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Select the [Advanced] tab.
5. Click the [Settings] button of [ICMP].
- 212 -

225. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. If [Allow incoming echo request] is not checked, check it, and click the [OK] button.
This allows a response to be made to PING from other devices.
7. Select the [Exceptions] tab.
8. Click the [Add Port] button, and make settings as follows:
- 213 -

226. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
9. Click the [OK] button.
- 214 -

227. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
Windows Vista Home Basic and Windows Vista Home Premium do not have IIS
(Internet Information Service).
Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.
2. Click [Programs].
- 215 -

228. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].
4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Management Console] and [FTP Server] in
[FTP Publishing Service]. Next, click the [OK] button.
- 216 -

229. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are
finished.
Setting the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.
- 217 -

230. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
2. Click [System and Maintenance].
3. Click [Administrative Tools].
- 218 -

231. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
4. Double-click [Services] to start it.
5. Select [FTP Publishing Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 219 -

232. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
6. Display the [General] property sheet.
Change [Manual] to [Automatic] in [Startup type] and click the [Start] button in [Service status],
then click the [OK] button.
End [Services].
7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then Double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0
Manager] ([IIS6 Manager]) to start it.
- 220 -

233. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
8. Double-click [FTP Sites], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.
9. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet.
Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP site directory]. In [Directory listing style], [MS-DOS] is selected
by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format,
whether each file is accessible can be determined.
- 221 -

234. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
10. Then, click the [OK] button.
In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory inetpubftproot (on the drive where Windows Vista
is installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed.
To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP
site directory] mentioned in step 9 above.
11. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 10 above, a
virtual directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows
Vista.
Login User Setting
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.
2. Click [User Accounts].
- 222 -

235. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Click [Add or remove user accounts].
4. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.
The access right set here can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.
- 223 -

236. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
6. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed
without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
- 224 -

237. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
7. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.
8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.
Stopping password expiration for a login user
If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password.
If you are necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.
1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt], right-click it to display a
menu, then select [Run as administrator].
- 225 -

238. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.
3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows Vista
Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows Vista, the Data Server may
not communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.
NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.
- 226 -

239. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Click [System and Maintenance].
3. Click [Administrative Tools].
- 227 -

240. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Double-click [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] to start it.
5. Click [Inbound Rules], select [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4 - In)] from the list,
right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 228 -

241. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. Display the [General] property sheet.
Check [Enabled] in [General], then click the [OK] button.
End [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security].
7. Return to [Control Panel], then click [Security].
- 229 -

242. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
8. Click [Windows Firewall].
9. Click [Change settings].
- 230 -

243. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
10. Select the [Exceptions] tab.
Check [FTP Server], then click the [OK] button.
- 231 -

244. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
The FTP Server features depend on the Edition of Windows 7.
Windows 7 Professional, Enterprise, and Ultimate have the FTP Server features.
The setting described above is just an example.
Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
2. Click [Programs].
- 232 -

245. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].
4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Service] in [FTP Server] and [IIS
Management Console] in [Web Management Tools]. Next, click the [OK] button.
- 233 -

246. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are
finished.
Setting the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
- 234 -

247. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Click [System and Security].
3. Click [Administrative Tools].
- 235 -

248. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Double-click [Services] to start it.
5. Select [Microsoft FTP Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 236 -

249. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. Display the [General] property sheet.
Choose [Automatic] from [Startup type] drop-down list. Next, if [Service status] is not [Started],
click the [Start] button to start FTP service, then click the [OK] button to end [Services].
- 237 -

250. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager] to
start it.
- 238 -

251. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
8. Right-click Computer name(“PC1” in the following figure) to display a left side menu, then select
[Add FTP Site...].
9. The [Site Information] dialog box below is displayed. Input any site name in [FTP site name:] and
physical path of the home directory in [Physical path:].
The physical path is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be
accessed.
Click [Next] button.
10. The [Binding and SSL setting] dialog box below is displayed.
Input the IP address and port number (usually 21) in [IP Address] and [Port].
Check [Start FTP site automatically] and select [No SSL] in [SSL].
Click [Next] button.
- 239 -

252. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
11. The [Authentication and Authorization Information] dialog box below is displayed.
Check [Basic] in [Authentication], choose [All users] from [Allow access to:] drop-down list in
[Authorization], and check [Read] and [Write] in [Permissions].
Click [Finish] button.
12. Expand tree in left pane and select FTP site name set in step 9.
A feature menu of FTP site is displayed. Double-click [FTP Directory Browsing].
- 240 -

253. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
13. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.
However, it is recommended to select [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is
accessible can be determined.
14. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 9 above, a virtual
directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows 7.
- 241 -

254. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Login User Setting
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
2. Click [Add or remove user accounts].
3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.
The access right can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication.
Use care when setting an access right.
- 242 -

255. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
4. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
5. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed
without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
- 243 -

256. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
6. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.
8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.
Stopping password expiration for a login user
If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password. If necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
- 244 -

257. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
2. Click [System and Security].
3. Click [Administrative Tools].
- 245 -

258. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
4. Double-click [Computer Management] to start it.
5. Expand [Local Users and Groups] in left pane, then click [Users]. A list of registered users is
displayed.
Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.
- 246 -

259. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
6. Check [Password never expires] and then click [OK] button.
The password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows 7
Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows 7, the Data Server may not
communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.
- 247 -

260. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
2. Click [System and Security].
- 248 -

261. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
3. Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
4. Click [Change settings].
- 249 -

262. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Check [FTP Server] and network location types.
Network location types depend on the connecting network setting and configuration.
6. Click [OK] button to close this window.
7. Return to [System and Security], then click [Windows Firewall].
- 250 -

263. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
8. Click [Advanced settings].
9. Click [Inbound Rules].
- 251 -

264. B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
10. Check if [FTP Server (FTP Traffic-In)], [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)], and [File
and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)] are enabled. If those rules are not enable, select
them and click [Enable Rule] in right pane. There are same name rule in [Inbound Rules], but their
targets are different network location. The choice of rule to change enabled depend on rule’s
[Profile] and network location types.
- 252 -

265. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP
This appendix describes the method of setting up the DNS/DHCP server of Windows 2000 Server.
NOTE
This appendix provides just examples of setup using Windows 2000 Server. To
use the DNS/DHCP server in an actual factory network, consult with the network
administrator of the factory and make settings according to the actual network
environment.
Example of setting a simple network
An example of setup in a network configuration that satisfies the following conditions is provided:
1. The DHCP server and DNS server are operated using the same personal computer.
2. The IP address of the DHCP server and DNS server is 192.168.0.254.
3. The DHCP server controls the IP address range 192.168.0.10 to 192.168.0.29.
4. The domain controlled by the DNS server is named "factory".
5. The same domain includes the DHCP server, DNS server, CNCs, and a PC for FOCAS1/Ethernet
applications.
Windows 2000 Server
DNS server
DHCP server
192.168.0.254
Domain : factory
...
CNC CNC PC
Automatic setting Automatic setting Automatic setting
Example of network configuration
NOTE
The setting described above is just an example. For setup in an actual network
configuration in the factory, consult with the network administrator of the factory.
- 253 -

266. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DHCP)
Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DHCP].
2. Adding a scope
Click [Action] → [New Scope] to start “New Scope Wizard”.
Click the [Next] button.
- 254 -

267. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
Enter "factory" as [Name], and enter "FACTORY" as [Description].
Click the [Next] button.
Enter “192.168.0.10” as [Start IP address], enter “192.168.0.29” as [End IP address], enter “24” as
[Length], and enter “255.255.255.0” as [Subnet mask].
Click the [Next] button.
Click the [Next] button without entering any data.
- 255 -

268. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Keep "8" days unchanged as Period, then click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, I want to configure these options now] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Click the [Next] button without entering any data.
Enter “192.168.0.254” as IP Address, then click [Add].
- 256 -

269. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
Click the [Next] button.
Click the [Next] button without entering any data.
Keep [Yes, I want to activate this scope now] selected, and click the [Next] button.
- 257 -

270. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Click [Finish].
3. Adding a scope option
Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory], then click [Scope Options] → [Action] → [Configure Options].
From the available options, find and check [DNS Domain Name]. Then, enter "factory" as String value.
Click the [OK] button.
The following setting is made:
- 258 -

271. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
4. Enabling Dynamic DNS
Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory] → [Properties] → [DNS].
Check [Always update DNC] and [Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update].
Click the [OK] button.
This completes DHCP server setting.
- 259 -

272. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DNS)
Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DNS].
2. DNS server configuration
Click [Action] → [Configure the server] to start [Configure DNS Server Wizard].
Click the [Next] button.
- 260 -

273. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
Keep [This is the first DNS server on this network] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, create a forward lookup zone], and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Enter "factory." as Name. (Do not fail to enter "." after "factory".)
Click the [Next] button.
- 261 -

274. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Keep “factory.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, create a reverse lookup zone] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Enter “192.168.0” as Network ID.
- 262 -

275. C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
Click the [Next] button.
Keep “0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.
Click the [Finish] button.
- 263 -

276. C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
3. Enabling Dynamic DNS
Right-click [Forward Lookup Zones] → [factory].
Click [Properties].
For [Allow dynamic updates?], select [Yes].
Click the [OK] button.
This completes DNS server setting.
- 264 -

277. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
D FTP CLIENT OPERATION
This appendix describes the method of operating an FTP client that operates on the host computer to
function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.
D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND
Login
1 Enter "ftp IP-address-of-NC or host-name" at the command prompt.
2 Enter a user name.
3 Enter a password.
4 The message, "230 User logged in, proceed." indicates that the login process has been completed
successfully.
GET (acquiring a file from the FTP server)
1 Enter "get hard-disk-file-name."
MGET (acquiring files from the FTP server)
1 Enter "mget hard-disk-file-name (including a wildcard character)."
- 265 -

278. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
PUT (sending a file to the FTP server)
1 Enter "put host-file-name hard-disk-file-name."
MPUT (sending files to the FTP server)
1 Enter "mput host-file-name (including a wildcard character)."
DIR (acquiring a list of files of the FTP server)
1 Enter dir.
DEL (deleting a file from the FTP server)
1 Enter "del hard-disk-file-name."
TYPE (confirming the transfer type of the FTP client)
1. Enter type.
2. Whether the ascii mode or binary mode is set can be determined.
- 266 -

279. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
ASCII, BIN (changing the transfer type of the FTP client)
1. Entering bin can change the mode to the binary mode.
2. Entering ascii can change the mode to the ascii mode.
Logout
1 Enter bye.
D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer
D.2.1 Displaying the File List
Windows Explorer can display the file list in Data Server by adding the network shortcut that connects to
Data Server with FTP connection.
Display layout (such as Icon, List, or Detail etc.) of files in Data Server can be selected by standard
operation of Windows Explorer.
Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows 2000 Professional)
1. Start an Explorer.
- 267 -

280. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
2. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submemu of [Tools] on the menu bar.
3. Click “Create a shortcut to a Web folder or FTP site.” to start “Add Network Place Wizard”.
4. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.
- 268 -

281. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
5. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Finish].
6. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.
The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data
Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.
- 269 -

282. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows XP Professional)
1. Start an Explorer.
2. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submemu of [Tools] on the menu bar.
- 270 -

283. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
3. Click “Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server.” to start “Add Network Place
Wizard”. Next, click [Next].
4. Select “Choose another network location”, then click [Next].
- 271 -

284. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
5. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.
6. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].
- 272 -

285. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
7. Click [Finish].
8 Check [Enable folder view for FTP sites] in Internet Options as follows. (This item is checked by
default.)
- 273 -

286. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
NOTE
If this item is not checked, the file list in Data Server is displayed as shown in the
following figure, and the files cannot be transferred by operating drag and drop.
9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.
The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data
Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.
- 274 -

287. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
Register Data Server as a Network Location (for Windows Vista Business or
Windows 7 Professional)
1. Start an Explorer.
2. Display the menu of [Organize], then check [Menu Bar] in [Layout] to display the menu bar.
- 275 -

288. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
3. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submemu of [Tools] on the menu bar.
4. Click “Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures.” to start “Add
Network Location”. Next, click [Next].
- 276 -

289. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
5. Select “Choose a custom network location”, then click [Next].
6. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.
- 277 -

290. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
7. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].
8. Click [Finish].
- 278 -

291. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.
The icon of Data Server is added in Computer. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be
displayed by double-clicking this icon.
NOTE
1 If Work Offline is run in Internet Explorer, when the file list in Data Server attempt
to be displayed by the Explorer, the error shown below occurs.
In this case, it is necessary to stop Work Offline in Internet Explorer. Remove
check [Work Offline] in submenu of [File] on the menu bar in Internet Explorer.
2 Even if the file list in Data Server is changed by operating CNC, it is not
automatically updated in the Explorer. If the FTP communication with Data
Server is not performed for five minutes or more, Data Server disconnects the
FTP connection. Execute [Refresh] in the Explorer to acquire the latest file list in
Data Server.
- 279 -

292. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer
NOTE
Files in Data Server cannot be copied or moved to another folder in Data Server
by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
MOVE FOLDER
A work folder in Data Server can be moved by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE
1 To create a new folder in Data Server by standard operation of Windows
Explorer, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required.
2 The name of the folder ("New Folder") made by standard operation of Windows
Explorer contains characters that cannot be used in Data Server. Be sure to
rename that folder by operation of the Explorer. If not renamed, that folder
cannot be used in Data Server.
As shown in the following figure, characters that cannot be used in Data Server
are displayed as ‘#’ in DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.
3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."
DELETE
A file or folder (multiple files or folders) in Data Server can be deleted by standard operation of Windows
Explorer.
NOTE
1 The folder to be deleted need not be empty. When the folder is not empty, all
files and sub-folders in the folder are deleted.
2 There is not limitation of number of files or folders that can be selected at a time.
3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."
RENAME
A file or folder in Data Server can be renamed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE
The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."
- 280 -

293. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
DISPLAY FILE CONTENTS
Contents of a file in Data Server can be displayed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE
Contents of a file is displayed by Internet Explorer regardless of the relation by
the extension.
If a file is not downloaded to the personal computer side, the contents of the file
cannot be edited.
FILE TRANSFER
Start two Windows Explorers. One Explorer displays the file list in Data Server, and the other displays
the file list in the personal computer.
Some files can be transferred by operating drag and drop from one window to the other.
The figure below shows the example that a file in the personal computer side is transferred to the Data
Server side.
File list in PC side
Operates drag & drop
File list in Data Server side
Example of file transfer by using Windows Explorer
- 281 -

294. D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04
NOTE
1 If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, ”ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”
2 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
3 The attribute of files to be transferred by using Windows Explorer is fixed to
binary. When NC programs are transferred as text files, fix the attribute to text by
the setting of NC parameter No.929. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC
PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
4 When a file is transferred to Data Server, if a file having the same name as a file
to be transferred from the personal computer is already present on Data Server,
by the setting of bit 2 of NC parameter No.906, you can select whether the
existing file is overwritten or an error is caused. For details, see Section 2.2,
"RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack
2) / Vista
When an attempt is made to start FTP communication for the first time in Windows XP (Service Pack 2)
or Windows Vista, the security alert shown below may appear.
If the alert appears, consult with the network administrator, and select "Unblock" as necessary.
Security Alert of Windows XP (Service Pack 2)
- 282 -

295. B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
Security Alert of Windows Vista
CAUTIOJN
Since selecting "Unblock" means change in settings related to network security,
be sure to consult with the network administrator in advance.
If "Unblock" is selected carelessly, network security can be compromised.
- 283 -

297. B-64014EN/04 INDEX
INDEX
EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.........................55
<A> EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER
ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B .................9 FUNCTIONS .............................................................47
ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION...........176 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
APPLICABLE MODELS ................................................3 FUNCTIONS .............................................................51
EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
<B> DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......................................69
BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF
PARAMETERS..........................................................33 Windows 2000 Server ..............................................255
EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF
<C> Windows 2000 Server ..............................................261
CABLE CONNECTION.......................................142,145 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP.................254
Cable Materials ............................................................145 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................152 FUNCTION................................................................78
CHECKING COMMUNICATION..............................182
CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB .....181 <F>
CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK....181 File Names of CNC File Management ...........................14
CHECKING SETTINGS .............................................182 File Operation and File Transfer ..................................281
Clamping and Shielding Cables ...................................148 File Transfer Operation ......................................... 106,113
COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS ...................................25
FUNCTION..............................................................177 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis ..................................122
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE FTP CLIENT OPERATION ........................................266
CONFIRMATION ...................................................172 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .............................30
COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION.......171 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS .......................................118
Component Layout................................................157,160 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................173
CONNECTING TO Ethernet .......................................142
Connector Specification ...............................................147 <G>
CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE GENERAL.......................................................................3
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC .........65 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-1
Grounding the Network................................................150
<D>
DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT......................13 <H>
DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....................................13 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ....157
DATA SERVER MODES..............................................15 HARDWARE OPTIONS.................................................9
DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION....................24
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND <I>
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 Installation ............................................................ 133,138
DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................17 Installation on a stand-alone type unit .................. 134,139
DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit............ 133,138
SCREEN..............................................................95,124 Installing a memory card....................................... 135,140
Diagnosis status............................................................120
DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE <L>
EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD ....7 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE......................144
Displaying and Operating the File List ..........100,110,126 LED Indications and Meanings............................. 158,161
Displaying the File List................................................268 LIST FILE FORMAT ....................................................22
DNC OPERATION......................................................116
DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS..............................26 <M>
M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL ......................115
<E> MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ......27
ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES ........148
ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING <N>
PARAMETER SETTING ..........................................91 NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................20
Error numbers and error messages ...............................121 NC PROGRAM INPUT........................................ 116,129
ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION .......169 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT.................................... 117,129
Ethernet LOG...............................................................164 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data
EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP........................185 Server .........................................................................14
i-1

298. INDEX B-64014EN/04
<O> SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST FUNCTIONS .............................................................60
SCREEN.....................................................................96 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....95 FUNCTION................................................................70
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
SCREEN...................................................................108 FUNCTION................................................................70
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000
SCREEN.....................................................................36 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION
OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SERVICE)................................................................185
SCREEN.....................................................................48 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR
OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............233
FUNCTION..............................................................123 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR
OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............216
LIST SCREEN .........................................................125 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .....................................119 SERVICE)................................................................196
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE Signal Timing Charts .....................................................67
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............................................119 Signals............................................................................65
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......164
DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN.............................60 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ..................................................9
OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER .....................20 Specifications........................................................ 133,137
OPERATION USING THE Explorer...........................268 Starting Diagnosis ........................................................120
OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND............266
ORGANIZATION ...........................................................3 <T>
Text Files and Binary Files ............................................15
<P> Total connection diagram...................................... 135,140
PREFACE ........................................................................7 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................181
Preparations for File Operation ....................................114 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION..............145
Preparations for File Operation and Editing.................107
<U>
<R> UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ................28
RELATED MANUALS ...................................................4
RELATED NC PARAMETERS........ 9,43,50,55,64,84,89 <W>
REVISION RECORD ......................................................1 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet
RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ...............144 Function......................................................................57
When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of
<S> the Data Server ...........................................................56
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...........55
SCREEN LAYOUT .......................................................12 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated 68
SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted67
Pack 2) / Vista ..........................................................283 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected 68
Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..................................120 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple
Selection of Mode ..........................................................73 Method) ......................................................................82
SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response
SOFTWARE OPTIONS.............................................10 Notice method)...........................................................79
Separating Signal Lines................................................148 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ........................................137,160 Method) ......................................................................81
Series 30i/31i/32i-A ..............................................133,157
SETTING .....................................................................133
Setting Method by CNC Screen .....................................74
Setting Method by Personal Computer...........................78
SETTING OF DHCP .....................................................53
SETTING OF DNS ........................................................52
SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ......33
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...........36
SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION.....................52
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .........48
SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ...86
i-2

299. B-64014EN/04 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Addition of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
04 Nov., 2010 • Addition of unsolicited messaging function and ftp file transfer function
• Correction of errors
• Addition of such as NC program input/output on the Data Server functions
03 Aug., 2005
• Correction of errors
• Addition of the machine remote diagnosis function
02 Sep., 2004 • Addition of the Series 31i/310i-A, 32i/320i-A
• Correction of errors
01 Sep., 2003
r-1

301. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

302. FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
1. Type of applied technical documents
FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B
Name
FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B
Fast Ethernet
Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Spec.No./Version B-64014EN/04
2. Summary of change
Group Name / Outline New, Applicable
Add, Date
Correct,
Delete
Basic
Function
Optional Modbus/TCP Server function is added into APPENDIX E. Add Immediately
Function
Unit
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B. Add Immediately
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 1/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

303. E Modbus/TCP Server function
E.1 OVERVIEW
The Server function of Modbus/TCP functions is supported.
NOTE
1 In this function, the client function of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported.
2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use Modbus/TCP Server function
(R968).
Modbus/TCP data model
The following four kinds of data formats are defined as Modbus/TCP data model.
Table name Object type (Data type) Type of READ/WRITE
Discrete input Single bit READ only
Coils Single bit READ-WRITE
Input Registers 16-bit word READ only
Holding Registers 16-bit word READ-WRITE
NOTE
1 In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, only ”Holding Registers” can be used.
”Discrete input”, Coils”, and “Input Registers” cannot be used.
2 "READ" means the input of data from the client, and "WRITE" means the data of
output from the client.
Modbus/TCP function code
In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, the following function codes are supported.
Function code name Code
Read Holding Registers 03h
Write Multiple Registers 10h
Read/Write Multiple Registers 17h
Modbus area (Holding Registers)
In Modbus/TCP Server function, the Modbus area (Holding Registers) of 64K words (128K bytes) is prepared.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 2/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

304. And the Modbus area can be allocated to the PMC area.
As a result, the data accessed from the client device to the Modbus area can be notified to the PMC area, and the
user application (Ladder program etc.) can be accessed to the Modbus area through the PMC area.
This allocation can be set up to three areas.
The minimum access unit of Modbus area is “a word” and the range of the address is 1- 65536.
Modbus/TCP Modbus/TCP User
Client Server Application
Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
15 0 7 0
00001→
Area1
0 15
Write Registers
Area2
0 15
Read Registers
Area3
65536→
Specification of Modbus/TCP Server function
The specification of FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function is shown in the following.
1 “Automatic TCP connection management” is implemented. This means that user application (such as
Ladder program) does not need to take care of TCP connection.
2 “Non-priority connection pool” is implemented. This means that the oldest connection is disconnected
when the requests from the multiple clients are received and the connections are full, FANUC
Modbus/TCP Server function can receive the requests from the maximum 10 clients at the same time.
“Priority connection pool” is not implemented.
3 “Access control service” is not implemented. This means that all of device can be accessed without
authorization (user name, or password).
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 3/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

305. E.2 SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
This chapter describes the communication setting for the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Notes on using the Modbus/TCP Server function
NOTE
1 The client of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported.
2 The number of Modbus/TCP clients that can be connected with one CNC is
maximum 10 at the same time. When more than ten connections are attempted,
the oldest communication is disconnected.
3 Please confirm that there is no problem as the entire system when
communicating with the device of the other companies.
E.2.1 SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key
does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [Modbus SET], and then enter the parameters.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 4/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

306. COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet.
(Example of specification format "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Fast Ethernet
Modbus SERVER screens
Press soft key [Modbus SET] to display the Modbus SERVER screen.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 5/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

307. Modbus/TCP Server screen 1 (BASIC) Modbus/TCP Server screen 2 (AREA1-3)
Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify the port number for using Modbus/TCP Server function. The input range is
from 0 to 65535. Usually, set 502.
When 0 is set, the Modbus/TCP Server function is not operated.
OPTION1 Bit 0 : BCE
Byte arrangement in the Modbus area is assumed to be
0 : a little endian
1 : a big endian
Bit 1 – 7 : RSV
Be sure to set 0.
STATUS PMC ADDRESS The top address in the E/R area of PMC that stores status is set. The setting range
depends on an effective PMC area. This status is occupied by one byte. Specify a
space (blank) when not using this status. In this case, “---“ is displayed.
DATA Modbus ADDRESS The top address in Modbus area (Holding registers) where I/O is exchanged for the
Modbus/TCP client is set. The setting range is 1 – 65536.
DATA PMC ADDRESS The top address in E/R/D area of PMC that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP
client is set. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Only the
even-numbered address can be set. Specify a space (blank) when not exchanging
I/O. In this case, “---“ is displayed.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 6/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

308. Item Description
DATA SIZE The data size (unit: word size) that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP client is set.
The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Set 0 when not exchanging
I/O.
CAUTION
The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However,
on Series 30i/31i/32i-A and Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B it can also be used as
nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile
memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off.
So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation
when the power is turned on next time.
NOTE
1 When setting the PMC area, note the following:
For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a
PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first
path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between an area such as the input data area
of the user program and a PMC area used for other purposes.
3 This parameter is backed up and stored with Fast Ethernet.
When backing up or storing the parameter, please execute it by the common
screen of Fast Ethernet.
4 The changed parameter is effective by turning the power off and on.
5 Please set not to overlap the Modbus area in area 1-3. When the overlapping
setting is done, operation is different in READ/WRITE as follows.
In case of READ, the data in area n (n is the biggest number) is read.
In case of WRITE, the same data as all the overlapping areas is written.
Byte arrangement of Modbus area (Holding Registers)
The byte arrangement in Modbus area is normally a little endian.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 7/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

309. On Ethernet line Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
0 15 15 0 7 0
+00 +00 +00
12h 34h 34h 12h 34h
+01 56h 78h +01 78h 56h +01 12h
+02 78h
+03 56h
When Bit0 of OPTION1 is "1", byte arrangement of data becomes a big endian.
On Ethernet line Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
0 15 0 15 7 0
+00 +00 +00
12h 34h 12h 34h 12h
+01 56h 78h +01 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
Status
The status detected by Modbus/TCP Server function
STATUS
STATUS PMC ADDRESS Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Modbus status
Bit0 : The serious error was detected.
Bit1 - Bit5 : Reserved.
Bit6 : The initialization was completed.
Bit7 : Under communicating with one Modbus/TCP client or more.
E.2.2 MAINTENANCE SCREENS OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
The connection status of the client of Modbus/TCP can be confirmed on this screen.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key
does not appear, press the continue key.)
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 8/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

310. 3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [Modbus MAINTE], and then Modbus SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)
is displayed.
Modbus/TCP SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)
Display item
Item Description
CLIENT IP address of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Modbus/TCP Server is displayed.
(Example of display form "192.168.0.200")
It is displayed in order of communicating with this Server.
TIME The connecting time of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Server is displayed.
The displayed time is updated automatically.
The display form displays hour (hhh), minute (mm) and second (ss) in the form of "hhh:mm:ss". When
the maximum value is exceeded by "999: 59:59", the maximum value is not updated from "999: 59:59".
E.2.3 LOG SCREEN OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
The communication log related to Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 9/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

311. LOG screen for Modbus/TCP Server function
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the Ethernet
log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [Modbus], and then the information related to the Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.
Modbus/TCP LOG screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence
date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss”,
where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss
represents second.
The top item in the example above indicates “22:32:47 on September 10”.
To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
NOTE
The Modbus/TCP Server log information is stored in volatile memory and it is lost
when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error
occurs.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 10/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

312. The following lists major log message:
Error Code Log message Meaning and action to be taken
E-0B47 TCP port number of Modbus/TCP Server is A value outside the valid setting range might be set.
wrong
E-0B48 Status PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server A value outside the valid setting range might be set.
is out of range
E-0B49 Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is The odd address might be set.
wrong
E-0B4A Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is A value outside the valid setting range might be set.
out of range
E-0B4B Modbus area of Modbus/TCP Server is out of A value outside the valid setting range might be set.
range
E-1001 All Modbus communication paths are busy The communication destination (Modbus/TCP client)
exceeded 10 nodes.
For a new communication destination (Modbus/TCP
client), the oldest connection is disconnected.
E-1003 Version number of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct version number according
to the protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-1004 Length of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct size according to the
protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-100B Function code of Modbus packet is wrong The specified function code might not be supported.
Please refer to “1. Modbus/TCP SERVER
FUNCTION” about the supported function code.
E-1015 Data address of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct data address according to
E-1016 the protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-1017 Data value of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct data value according to the
E-1018 protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-1019
E-XXXX (No message) Internal error
Report the error number to FANUC.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A
Title FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B
Modbus/TCP Server function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-1
02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 11/11
Date 2010.12.13 Design Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai

313. FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
1. Type of applied technical documents
FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B
Name
FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B
Fast Ethernet
Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Spec.No./Version B-64014EN/04
2. Summary of change
Group Name / Outline New, Applicable
Add, Date
Correct,
Delete
Basic
Function
Optional EtherNet/IP Adapter function is added as Appendix F. Add Immediately
Function
Unit
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 1/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

314. F EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION
F.1 OVERVIEW
F.1.1 INTRODUCTION
EtherNet/IP is a industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open
DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP
has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover,
EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with a general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet
technology is used.
NOTE
1 EtherNet/IP Adapter function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –B only.
2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Adapter function
(R967).
NOTE
This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP.
Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP.
For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of
ODVA that manages the specification.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 2/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

315. F.1.2 TERMINOLOGY
Direction of DI and DO
In this chapter, the signal that CNC receives from Scanner is DI, and the signal that CNC send to Scanner is
DO.
CNC (Adapter)
DI
Scanner
DO
Connection
To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called " connection", is established.
When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged.
CNC supports maximum 32 connections.
Adapter and Scanner
The scanner sends the adapter the connection request, and the adapter responds to the connection request. When
the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection is established. The scanner sends the communication
setting to the adapter by the connection request.
CNC supports the adapter function.
EDS file
The adapter offers the communication setting by the text file called "EDS file". The scanner or scanner setting
tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting.
By operating the CNC screen, EDS file can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory.
Implicit message and Explicit message
In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and
another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and
the latter is called "Explicit message".
In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the
connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure.
CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be
used.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 3/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

316. The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or
writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own
value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure.
CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used.
This chapter explains Implicit message in section "F.1.4 ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF
SCANNER" and "F.1.5 EDS FILE", and explains Explicit message in section "F.1.7 EXPLICIT MESSAGE".
Originator and Target
At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the
connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as a originator of
connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection.
CNC supports Class 1 target.
Client and Server
At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to
the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data.
CNC supports Class 3 server.
RPI and API
In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval
that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called
API (Actual Packet Interval).
Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only
In Class1 communication, there are following three types of communication.
Type of Description
communication
Exclusive Owner Both DI signal from the scanner to the adapter and DO signal from the adapter to the
scanner is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to
the same DI signal from multiple devices.
Input Only Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged.
Listen Only Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other
Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established.
Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner
devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 4/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

317. Allocation setting
In CNC, the data area exchanged between the scanner is specified by the setting called "allocation setting". The
PMC data area is used. Maximum four allocation settings can be specified.
Network composition of I/O transmission
Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission
interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting.
Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used.
Multiple scanners are connected to one DO signal of the adapter is transmitted
adapter by multicast
Scanner Scanner Scanner Scanner
Setting1 Setting1 Setting1 Setting1
DI DO DI DO DI DI
DO DI DO DI DO
Setting1 Setting2 Setting1
Adapter Adapter
F.1.3 SPECIFICATION OF CNC ADAPTER FUNCTION
Specification of CNC
Item Description
Supported CNC type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B
Supported hardware Following hardware is supported.
- Multi-function Ethernet
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type
Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B (Connector name: CD38B)
- Fast Ethernet Board
Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)
Hardware that operates the EtherNet/IP Adapter function and the Ethernet function is
specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for
details.
Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function.
- EtherNet/IP Adapter function (R967)
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 5/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

318. - Ethernet function (S707)
The EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with the same hardware as the Ethernet
function. It cannot operate with another hardware.
Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Data Server function cannot be specified at the
same time.
EtherNet/IP Adapter function and FL-net function (J692) cannot operated with the
same hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP Adapter function does
not operate.
NOTE
When EtherNet/IP Adapter function is used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can
be connected to one CNC.
Specification of EtherNet/IP Adapter
Item Description
Communication type Class 1 target, Class 3 server
Data type of CNC PMC data (R, E and D area)
Maximum number of 4
allocation setting
Maximum data size per 256 byte
allocation setting
Maximum number of 32
connection
Range of RPI 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms)
Bridge to DeviceNet Not supported
Specification of communication
Item Description
IP address Specified by either of the following methods.
- Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen.
- Acquires from DHCP server.
(It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the
DHCP server once.)
Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed)
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 6/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

319. Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed)
Ethernet interface Following settings are supported.
- 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
- Half duplex or Full duplex
- Auto Negotiation or Fixed
Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.
F.1.4 ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF SCANNER
The I/O area used to exchange data with the scanner is specified in the allocation setting. The address and the
size of the PMC area are set. Maximum four settings are specified.
The following is the example that two allocation settings are used.
Number of Allocation PMC address Size
setting
1 DI 1:R1000 8
DO 1:R1008 8
2 DI 1:R2000 16
DO 1:R2016 16
3 DI Not used Not used
DO Not used Not used
4 DI Not used Not used
DO Not used Not used
The scanner uses the adapter internal data number to specify the data to exchange. It is the values such as 101,
151, 102 and 152 in the following figure. The number of this internal data is called the instance of the Assembly
object.
In CNC, the relation between the number of the allocation setting and the instance of the Assembly object is
fixed, and the relation is written in the EDS file.
The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file, and acquires the relation between the allocation setting and
the instance of Assembly object. The operator specifies the number of allocation setting as the connection used
by the communication.
Therefore, when the scanner device is set by using EDS file, the data area of the CNC can be specified by the
number of the allocation setting.
The general procedure of the setting for EtherNet/IP is as follows.
A. The value is set to the allocation setting in the CNC screen.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 7/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

320. B. EDS file is output by CNC.
C. The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file.
D. The operator selects the allocation setting of CNC by operating the setting tool of the scanner, and specifies
the scanner setting if necessary.
E. The setting of EtherNet/IP is transmitted from the setting tool to the scanner device. The instance of the
Assembly object corresponding to the selected allocation setting of CNC is notified to the scanner device.
F. The scanner device establishes the connection to CNC by using the instance of the Assembly object, and
exchanges the DI/DO data.
Scanner device CNC
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Internal data
PMC area
(Assembly object)
A.
F. 101
Class 1
Communication
151
Allocation Setting 1
A.
F.
102
Class 1
Communication
152
Allocation Setting 2
E. (The instance of the Assembly object is notified.)
B.
PC
Setting tool of Scanner D. EDS file
Allocation Setting - Instance of Assembly
Selection of the Allocation Setting C. object
->Specifies Assembly object
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 8/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

321. NOTE
1 In this chapter, the procedures of A and B in the figure are explained. Please refer
to the manual of the scanner device for the procedure from C to E.
2 If either of the following case is applied, it is necessary to specify the instance of
the Assembly object corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the
scanner or the setting tool of the scanner.
- The scanner is set without using EDS file.
- Class 3 communication is executed to CNC.
3 Please refer to "F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for details of the
instance of the Assembly object.
F.1.5 EDS FILE
The setting of the connection that is acceptable by the adapter is described in EDS file with text format.
By operating the CNC screen, EDS file is output to the memory card or the USB memory.
Type
There are following two types in EDS file.
Type How to create Description
Standard EDS file Output EDS file after all EDS file that can be used for the general purpose
allocation settings are disabled. The content of the allocation setting is not reflected.
EDS file corresponding to Output EDS file after at least EDS file where the content of the allocation setting is
the allocation setting one allocation setting is reflected
enabled. Items to set in the setting tool of the scanner are few and
the setting is easy.
Contents of EDS file
The contents other than the setting of the connection are the same between the standard EDS file and the EDS
file corresponding to the allocation setting. This section explains the setting of the connection.
Standard EDS file
The setting of the following connections is preserved regardless of the content of the allocation setting of CNC.
[Four Allocation Settings : No.01 to No.04] *
[Three types of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only]
= Total 12 types
The DI/DO data size is not preserved in EDS file.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 9/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

322. Please specify the size at the setting tool of the scanner according to the allocation setting of CNC.
EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting
The contents correspond to the allocation setting of CNC. Only the enabled allocation setting is preserved.
Only the type of effective communication types are preserved based on the DI/DO size of the allocation setting
of CNC.
DI/DO size
Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only
in Allocation Setting
DI size : 1 or more
Enabled Enabled Enabled
DO size : 1 or more
DI size : 0
Disabled Enabled Enabled
DO size : 1 or more
DI size : 1 or more
Enabled Disabled Disabled
DO size : 0
DI/DO size specified by the allocation setting of CNC is preserved in EDS file. Therefore, the setting of the size
by the setting tool of the scanner is unnecessary.
Standard EDS file can be used by any CNC, and any setting is possible. However, it is necessary to specify the
value corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the setting tool of the scanner.
When EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is used, the setting at the setting tool of the scanner is
easy because the allocation setting of CNC is reflected. However, this EDS file can not be used with CNC of
other setting.
Please use it properly according to the usage.
NOTE
The value of ProductCode, MajRev and MinRev are the same between Standard
EDS file and EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting. The setting tool of the
scanner may be not able to distinguish these files.
Selection of the connection in the setting tool of the scanner
The setting of the connection preserved in EDS file is listed in the item of "Connection I/O type" or "Connection
Name" in the setting tool of the scanner.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 10/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

323. Example of the scanner setting tool
The meaning of the name of the connection displayed in the setting tool of the scanner is as follows.
No.01 Exclusive Owner
Type of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only or Listen Only
Number of the allocation setting : No.01 to No.04
Please select the allocation setting and the type of communication that is used by the communication with the
adapter.
F.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN
Unit of the data and concurrency
The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long
(4 byte).
The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.
Unit of data Restriction of PMC address Restriction of size
Byte (1 byte) N.A. N.A.
Word (2 byte) Aligned with 2-byte boundaries Aligned with 2-byte boundaries
(Even address only) (Even size only)
Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries Aligned with 4-byte boundaries
(Value can be fourthly divided only) (Value can be fourthly divided only)
The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 11/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

324. Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for
the setting method.
Conversion of endian
Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the
data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian.
Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for
the setting method.
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted.
Ethernet line PMC area
0 15 7 0
+00 +00
12h 34h 34h
+01 56h 78h +01 12h
+02 78h
+03 56h
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted.
Ethernet line PMC area
0 15 7 0
+00 +00
12h 34h 12h
+01 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted.
PMC area
Ethernet line 7 0
0 31
+00
+00
78h
12h 34h 56h 78h +01 56h
+02 34h
+03 12h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted.
PMC area
Ethernet line 7 0
0 31 +00
12h
+00
12h 34h 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 12/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

325. F.1.7 Explicit message
In Explicit message, there are two types of communication, connection type and non-connection type. CNC
supports both types. But this chapter explains only the Explicit message of non-connection type because it is
used commonly.
In Explicit message (Class 3), the PMC area can be read and written as well as Implicit message (Class 1). In
CNC (Explicit message server), the PMC area read and written is specified by using the allocation setting. In
Explicit message client, the area to read and write is specified by class and instance. It is necessary to specify
the instance of the Assembly object to read and write the PMC area of CNC. Please refer to "F.6.1
SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for the relation between the allocation setting and the instance of
Assembly object.
The procedure to read and write the PMC area by the Explicit message is as follows.
1. Specify the allocation setting of PMC area at the allocation screen of CNC.
2. Confirm the instance of Assembly object corresponding to the specified allocation setting.
Example) DO (T->O) of allocation setting No.1 is 65h and DI (O->T) of allocation setting No.1 is 97h.
3. In the Explicit message client, execute the function, Get_Attribute_Sigle (reading) or Set_Attribute_Single
(writing), with the argument of Assembly class (04h), instance corresponding to the allocation setting (65h
and 97h, etc) .
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 13/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

326. F.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE
This section explains the setting and the maintenance of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP
Adapter function.
F.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS
There are two methods of setting IP address.
1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.
2. Acquires a value from DHCP server
Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.
Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.
Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON
screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this
manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT
NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.
Acquires a value from DHCP server
Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION" of this manual.
When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures.
1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server.
2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory.
When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the
setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer.
Please refer to item “OPTION 1” in “Setting item” of “Basic screen” in “F.2.3 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER
SETTING SCREEN” for details.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 14/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

327. F.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT
The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Adapter function is shown on the title bar of each screen.
Title Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type
[MULTI-FUNC ETHER]
Series 30i/31i/32i /35i -B
[BOARD(SLOT1)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 1
[BOARD(SLOT2)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 2
[BOARD(SLOT3)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 3
[BOARD(SLOT4)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
F.2.3 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen consists of the basic screen (page 1) and the allocation screens (page 2 to 5).
A common setting to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is specified on the basic screen.
A setting for each allocation setting is specified on allocation screens.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 15/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

328. NOTE
1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen, set the
MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation
level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter the parameters.
Basic screen
1st page is basic screen. A common setting in the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is done.
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Basic)
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
[DI DATA] :
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 16/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

329. Setting item
Item Description
Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops.
HOLD : DI area is held. (Nothing is done).
DI DATA ON
CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero.
ABNORMAL
Soft key is used to change the setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select [HOLD]
or [CLEAR].
Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Adapter function
is stored.
STATUS
When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed
ADDRESS
in STATUS SIZE.
The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS SIZE too.
Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to PMC
area is limited according to this size.
STATUS SIZE When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed in
STATUS SIZE.
The setting range is either 0, 1 or 3.
Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address, DNS IP
address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP client function
(No.904#6).
Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are
0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM).
1 : saved in nonvolatile memory . When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically set to 1.
Bit 1 : DHCP client function is
0 : enabled.
OPTION 1
1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.)
Bit 2-4 : Reserved (Must be zero)
Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP function is
0 : enabled.
1 : disabled.
When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the maintenance screen, the indicators
of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL
NO.
Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, the setting of EtherNet/IP is
OPTION 2 0 : not initialized.
1 : initialized.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 17/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

330. Bit 1-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION
1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it
can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set
as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is
turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable
operation when the power is turned on next time.
2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used
for other purposes.
NOTE
1 When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm
state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back
on again.
2 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a
PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first
path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Display item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.
Status
The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
When STATUS SIZE is 1, only the first byte of status is output to PMC area, and when STATUS SIZE is 3, all
information is output.
Status
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
+0 OPE - - - - - - ERR
Status address +1 - - - - ENA4 ENA3 ENA2 ENA1
+2 - - - - IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 18/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

331. Offset Bit Name Description
#0 ERR Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault)
+0 #1-6 Reserved
#7 OPE Operating correctly (MS : device operational)
#0 ENA1 State of allocation 01 is enabled.
#1 ENA2 State of allocation 02 is enabled.
+1 #2 ENA3 State of allocation 03 is enabled.
#3 ENA4 State of allocation 04 is enabled.
#4-7 Reserved
#0 IN1 Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 01.
#1 IN2 Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 02.
+2 #2 IN3 Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 03.
#3 IN4 Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 04.
#4-7 Reserved
CAUTION
Even if the value of IN1 to IN4 is one, it is not guaranteed that the value of DI signal
is effective. Please confirm whether the communication is effective by the value of
an actual signal.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 19/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

332. Allocation screen
Page 2 to 5 is allocation screen. Page 2 to 5 corresponds to allocation 01 to 04.
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Allocation)
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
[STATE] :
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 20/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

333. Setting item
Item Description
Specify whether the allocation is used or not.
ENABLE : This allocation is used.
DISABLE : This allocation is not used.
If STATE is “ENABLE”, the setting can not be changed. When trying to change the setting, the
message "Change ENABLE into DISABLE" is displayed.
To change the setting, first set the item STATE to be "DISABLE". When the change is completed,
STATE set the item STATE to be "ENABLE".
When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If
there is a problem, the message is displayed and item STATE keeps "DISABLE".
Moreover, when NC stands up, the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If there is a problem,
item STATE is changed to "DISABLE" automatically.
Soft key is used for setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE] or
[DISABLE].
Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored.
0 : DI/DO data is not used.
1 : DI/DO data is allocated to PMC area.
TYPE
When the item TYPE is changed, ADDRESS is cleared to "---" and SIZE is cleared to zero.
If " "(Space) is set to ADDRESS or "0" is set to SIZE, "0" is displayed in TYPE, "---" is displayed in
ADDRESS and "0" is displayed to SIZE. The setting becomes unused.
Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored.
When the item TYPE is "0", the value cannot be set.
ADDRESS When the item TYPE is "1", the top address of PMC area is set. R, D or E area can be specified.
The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC.
It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area.
Specify the size of area where DI/DO data is stored.
When TYPE is “0”, the value can not be set.
SIZE When TYPE is "1", the size of PMC area is set.
The range is 1 to 256 (byte).
It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area.
Bit 0 : Unit of data is Word (2 byte).
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
OPTION
When enabled, both ADDREE and SIZE must be aligned with 2-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/2, R1002/4, E1004/6
Bit 1 : Unit of data is Long (4 byte).
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 21/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

334. 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
When enabled, both ADDRESS and SIZE must be aligned with 4-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/4, R1004/8, E1008/12
When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 0, unit of data is byte (1 byte).
When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 1, the setting is error.
Bit 2 : Endian conversion is
0 : disabled
1 : enabled
Bit 3-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION
1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it
can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set
as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power
is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable
operation when the power is turned on next time.
2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used
for other purposes.
NOTE
1 When item STATE is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm
state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back
on again.
2 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a
PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first
path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Conformance of the allocation setting
When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed.
If either of the following conditions is filled, the item STATE cannot be changed to "ENABLE" because there is
a problem.
- For both DI and DO, the item TYPE is "0".
- The item TYPE is set to "1", but the item ADDRESS is "---" or the item SIZE is 0.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 22/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

335. - The range of DI/DO area is out of PMC area.
- OPTION Bit 0 and Bit 1 are both set to "1".
- OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 2-byte boundaries.
- OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 4-byte boundaries.
F.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING
This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory.
When backing up and restoring the setting of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication parameters
of the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and
[ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear.
6 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
7 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key
[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed.
The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 23/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

336. BACKUP
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the
SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name “EIPADPT.MEM” is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the
memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name “EIPADPT.MEM” is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP
master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Adapter are saved from the
SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 24/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

337. ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP
master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP adapter are read from
the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that
parameter is not saved to the SRAM.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.
CAUTION
While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is
being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external
input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
NOTE
1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be
performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state.
2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that
requires power-off.
3 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether back up or restore of
the communication parameter for Ethernet function and EtherNet/IP Adapter
function is allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.
Related NC parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground
0020
input/output device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.
F.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE
This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 25/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

338. If the state of all allocation setting is disable, the standard EDS file is stored. If at least one of the allocation
setting is enable, EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is stored.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears.
6 Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
7 Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file.
If the file name is not specified, the file name “F_CNC101.EDS” is used.
The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.
CAUTION
While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is
being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external
input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 26/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

339. NOTE
1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode.
2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is
allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.
Related NC parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground
0020
input/output device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.
F.2.6 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER MAINTENANCE SCREEN
EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen consists of the adapter information screen (page 1), scanner list screens
(page 2 to 5) and scanner detail screen.
Adapter information screen shows the information about LED display of MS and NS, and information of the
adapter such as Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on.
Scanner list screen shows the list of connected scanners.
Scanner detail screen shows the detailed information like RPI and API for the selected scanner.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP A MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Press Page key to switch the page.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 27/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

340. Adapter information screen
1st page is a adapter information screen. Information about the adapter is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (adapter information)
Display item
Item Description
MS LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed.
NS LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed.
VENDOR ID Vendor ID of the adapter is displayed in hex.
DEVICE TYPE Device type of the adapter is displayed in hex.
PRODUCT CODE Product code of the adapter is displayed in hex.
REVISION Revision of the adapter is displayed. The format is “Major revision.Minor revision”.
SERIAL NO. Serial number of the adapter is displayed in hex.
The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.
LED display of MS Meaning
Steady Off DISABLE FUNCTION
Flashing Green STANDBY
Steady Green DEVICE OPERATIONAL
Flashing Red RECOVERABLE FAULT
Steady Red UNRECOVERABLE FAULT
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 28/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

341. The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.
LED display of NS Meaning
Steady Off (MS is steady off too) ---
Steady Off NO IP ADDRESS
Flashing Green NO CONNECTIONS
Steady Green CONNECTED
Flashing Red CONNECTION TIMEOUT
Steady Red DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS
Scanner list screen
Page 2 to 5 is a scanner list screen. Scanner currently connected is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner list)
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
Display item
Item Description
IP address of the scanner now connecting to the adapter is displayed in the list.
The scanner displayed in the list can be filtered by the allocation setting.
SCANNER LIST Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [FILTER].
If the soft key [FILTER] is pressed, the end of the title changes as follows.
[ALL] -> [ALLOCATION01]->[ALLOCATION02]->[ALLOCATION03]->[ALLOCATION04]->[ALL]->
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 29/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

342. Only the scanner connected with the allocation setting of the title is displayed in the list.
The connection type Explicit Message is displayed in [ALL].
IP ADDRESS IP address of the connected scanner is displayed.
The time connected with the scanner is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS.
TIME
When connect time exceeds 999:59:59, the display is not updated as 999:59:59.
Scanner detail screen
Procedure
1 On a scanner list screen, move the cursor to select the scanner for detail display.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [DETAIL]. The scanner detail screen is displayed.
3 To return to the scanner list screen, press soft key [LIST].
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner detail)
Display item
Item Description
IP address of the scanner is displayed.
When the connection is lost while displaying this scanner detail screen, the message "Disconnected"
IP ADDRESS
is displayed beside the IP address. In this case, the value of each item is not updated. Please return
to the list, and select the scanner again.
TIME It is the same as the item TIME in the scanner list screen.
ALLOCATION The number of the allocation that is used in the connection of the scanner is displayed.
It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the scanner requested to EtherNet/IP
RPI (ms)
adapter.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 30/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

343. O=>T (Originator => Target) means DI data receive interval (scanner => adapter ).
T=>O (Target => Originator) means DO data send interval (adapter => scanner).
It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the EtherNet/IP Adapter function actually
API (ms) processed.
O=>T means DI data receive interval, and T=>O means DO data send interval.
It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally received.
RECV
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the adapter function.
LOST
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally sent.
SEND
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
F.2.7 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION LOG SCREEN
The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the
continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EIP ADAPT], and then the information related to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is
displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter function log screen
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 31/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

344. The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence
date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss”,
where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss
represents second.
To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
NOTE
The log information of EtherNet/IP Adapter function is stored in volatile memory
and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when
an error occurs.
The following lists major log message:
Error Code Log message Meaning and action to be taken
E-1107 EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function cannot It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and
be used at the same time the FL-net function are operated with the same
hardware.
Please confirm the value of parameter No.970,
971, and 972.
E-1109 All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are busy Connections of the maximum number have
already been made.
The connection cannot be established exceeding
the maximum number.
E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is The unacceptable connection request was
refused received from the scanner.
E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is The unacceptable connection request was
refused (RPI Error) received from the scanner.
RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the
limits of value (4-10,000ms) that can be
accepted.
E-110C Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is The unacceptable connection request was
refused (DI/DO Size Error) received from the scanner.
The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner
is different from the size specified by the
allocation setting..
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 32/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

345. Error Code Log message Meaning and action to be taken
E-110D Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is The unacceptable connection request was
refused (Assembly Instance Error) received from the scanner.
The instance of the Assembly object specified
from the scanner is not in the adapter function.
The instance of the Assembly object is created if
the allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm
whether the allocation setting is enabled.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 33/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

346. F.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER
NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is as follows.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
907 100 FUL FIX
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 FIX : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is
0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.)
1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.)
#1 FUL : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication of Ethernet is
0 : Half-duplex.
1 : Full-duplex
This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
#2 100 : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the transmission rate of Ethernet is
0 : 10Mbps
1 : 100Mbps
This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function
0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function
0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 34/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

347. [Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] -1 to 6
Hardware that operates each function is selected.
Value Hardware
-1 Not used
0 Unsetting
1 Multi-function Ethernet
2 (reserved)
3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1
4 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2
5 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3
6 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
NOTE
1. EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with Ethernet function on the same
hardware that is specified by parameter No.970.
2. EtherNet/IP Adapter function cannot be operated on the same hardware as the
FL-net function. Therefore, parameter No.970 and No.971 or No.970 and No.972
cannot be set to the same value.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 35/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

348. F.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION
F.4.1 RPI AND DATA SIZE
In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per
second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. CNC supports maximum four allocation
settings. The total of data length per second is obtained by totaling these values.
Total of data length per second (byte) =
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.1 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.2 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.2 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.3 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.3 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )
RPI of Allocation setting No.4 (ms)
NOTE
Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.
The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP Adapter function of CNC can
operate is about 128,000 bytes.
Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range.
NOTE
The above mentioned maximum value of the total of the data length per second is
the value for the condition that other Ethernet function like FOCAS2/Ethernet
function or CNC Screen Display Function than EtherNet/IP Adapter function is not
used. There is a possibility of influencing to the performance when the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC Screen Display Function is used together with
the EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
The actual load can be confirmed by the value of RPI and API displayed on the
scanner detail screen. If the value of API is larger than RPI, the processing
performance of CNC may be not enough. Please set the value of RPI and size so
that the value of API is not regularly larger than RPI.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 36/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

349. Example 1)
CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and
RPI=4ms.
Adapter
CNC
Scanner
DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms
Allocation setting No.1 PLC
DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms
Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes)
Example 2)
CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3.
- PLC 1 : DI=64 bytes, DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms
- PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, RPI=20ms
- PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes, DO = 256 bytes, RPI = 20ms
Adapter
CNC
Scanner
DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms
Allocation setting No.1 PLC 1
DI=64 bytes, RPI=4ms
DO=128 bytes, RPI=20ms
Allocation setting No.2 PLC 2
DI=128 bytes, RPI=20ms
DO=256 bytes, RPI=20ms
Allocation setting No.3 PLC 3
DI=256 bytes, RPI=20ms
Total of data length per second
= ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 4) + ((128+128)*1000/20) + ((256+256)*1000/20))
= 70,4000 (bytes)
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 37/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

350. F.4.2 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME
This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner.
It is assumed that input/output signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner.
In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression.
Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3
Scanner
Ladder Tin1
EtherNet/IP
program
Scanner
function
Tout3
Tout2 Tin2
CNC Adapter
PMC Tout1
Data EtherNet/IP
area Adapter
Tin-out function
Tin3
Ladder
Program
Scanner output data reading time (Tin1)
It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP scanner function
receives the value of the signal in the scanner. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.
Scanner ouput processing time (Tin2)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter
function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP scanner function transmits the signal to the
network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can
be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 38/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

351. Adapter input data writing time (Tin3)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until
adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area
immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.
Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out)
The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder
program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.
Adapter output data reading time (Tout1)
It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until
EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC.
When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value
of 32ms.
Adapter output processing time (Tout2)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP scanner
function receives it.
The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet
transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the
maximum value is API(RPI).
Scanner input data writing time (Tout3)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data
to the ladder program. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 39/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

352. NOTE
1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until the
data is sent to the network is estimated in the expression, Tout1 + Tout2. The
maximum value is as follows.
- When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms)
- When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms)
2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the value
of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the Explicit
message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each 32ms.
When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately reflected in
the PMC data area.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 40/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

353. F.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM
The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that
uses EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
CAUTION
The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may
vary depending on the connected device status and other factors.
If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the
time or status, but actual communication data.
Input and output signals
An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing
process of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal
also flows a similar route in the opposite direction.
CNC
ＣＮＣ
PMC Input signal Output signal
リフレッシュ
Reading/writing EtherNet/IP
Process
処理 Adapter
DeviceNet
Ladder program
ラダープログラム マスタ機能
function
Process
処理
PMC Scanner
レジスタ
data
（メモリ）
area
Ethernet
Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function operate
asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of
reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed
at high-speed. The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output
from the ladder program.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 41/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

354. mth (m+1)th (m+2)th
Ladder program process
１ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
Content of data area A: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Content of data area B: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP : １，１ ２，１ ２，２ ３，３
１ １ ２ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
nth (n+1)th (n+2)th (n+3)th
Transferred to scanner
The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and
writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program.
The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in
the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder
program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time.
The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is cyclically made to
read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for
example, in the case of (n+1)th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be
read as one set.
Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one
execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.
CAUTION
Reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is made
asynchronously with the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the
following in mind when creating a ladder program.
1. When a input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is read
from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be
executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read.
2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the
specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device
before the ladder program is completely executed.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 42/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

355. Concurrency of data
When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and
word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.
CAUTION
If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word
data is not guaranteed.
Concurrency of long data (4-byte data)
To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions.
1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes.
Commands:
MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED,
DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED,
RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD,
RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD,
FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD,
MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD
2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16
3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the data unit of four bytes is specified.
Concurrency of word data (2-byte data)
To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions.
1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes.
Commands:
MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW,
DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW,
LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW,
SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB,
DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW,
SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 43/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

356. 2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8
3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the data unit of two bytes is specified.
Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data)
There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 44/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

357. F.6 ATTACHED MATERIAL
F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE
Supported class and instance are as follows.
Name Class code Instance number
Identity 01h 01h
Message Router 02h 01h
Assembly 04h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh
Connection Manager 06h 01h
Port F4h 01h
TCP/IP F5h 01h
Ethernet Link F6h 01h
The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object is as follows.
Number of Output Assembly (T->O) Input Assembly (O->T)
allocation Exclusive Owner,
Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only
setting Input Only, Listen Only
1 65h (101) 97h (151)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
2 66h (102) 98h (152)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte FEh (254) FFh (255)
3 67h (103) 99h (153) Size : 0 byte Size : 0 byte
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
4 68h (104) 9Ah (154)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
Number of
allocation Configuration Assembly
setting
1
2 64h (100)
3 Size : 0 byte
4
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B
Title
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-2
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 45/45
Date 2011.01.06 Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai

358. FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B
FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
1. Type of applied technical documents
FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B
Name
FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B
Fast Ethernet
Fast Data Server OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Spec.No./Version B-64014EN/04
2. Summary of change
Group Name / Outline New, Applicable
Add, Date
Correct,
Delete
Basic
Function
Optional EtherNet/IP Scanner function is added as Appendix G. Add Immediately
Function
Unit
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 1/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

359. Index
G EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION ····················································································································· 3
G.1 OVERVIEW ········································································································································· 3
G.1.1 INTRODUCTION ···································································································· 3
G.1.2 TERMINOLOGY······································································································ 4
G.1.3 CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION ······························································ 8
G.1.4 SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION······················································ 8
G.1.5 SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER ····································································10
G.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN ····························································· 11
G.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE ······································································································· 13
G.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS······················································································13
G.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT ··································································································14
G.2.3 EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN ······························································14
G.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING ······························································31
G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE···························································································34
G.2.6 Initialize ················································································································36
G.2.7 EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN ····················································37
G.2.8 EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN ··································································43
G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER ··········································································································· 46
G.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION······································································································· 49
G.4.1 RPI AND API ·········································································································49
G.4.2 RPI AND DATA SIZE·······························································································51
G.4.3 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME ·········································································54
G.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM·············································································· 57
G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION ·········································································································· 61
G.6.1 EXAMPLE (1)·········································································································61
G.6.2 EXAMPLE (2)·········································································································65
G.6.3 EXAMPLE (3)·········································································································68
G.7 ATTACHED MATERIAL ···················································································································· 74
G.7.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE ·····································································74
G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP ················································································75
G.7.3 SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE ·············································································77
G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL ···················································82
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 2/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

360. G EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION
G.1 OVERVIEW
G.1.1 INTRODUCTION
EtherNet/IP is an industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open
DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP
has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover,
EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet
technology is used.
NOTE
1 EtherNet/IP Scanner function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power
Motion i -A.
2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Scanner function
(R966).
NOTE
This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP.
Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP.
For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of
ODVA that manages the specification.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 3/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

361. G.1.2 TERMINOLOGY
Direction of DI and DO
In this chapter, the signal that CNC (scanner) receives from adapter is DI, and the signal that CNC send to
adapter is DO.
CNC (Scanner)
DI
Adapter
DO
Connection
To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called "connection", is established.
When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged.
Both EtherNet/IP Scanner function and EtherNet/IP Adapter function support maximum 32 connections.
Adapter and Scanner
The equipment that requests the connection to the adapter is the scanner. The equipment that responds to the
connection request from the scanner is the adapter. When the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection
is established. The scanner sends the communication setting to the adapter by the connection request.
CNC supports the scanner function and the adapter function. This chapter explains about scanner function.
In the following explanations, "EtherNet/IP functions" means both EtherNet/IP Adapter function and
EtherNet/IP Scanner function.
EDS file
In EtherNet/IP, the equipment specification is provided by the text file called "EDS file". The information about
the communication setting that the adapter can accept, or the communication control of the scanner. The scanner
setting tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting.
EtherNet/IP functions allow preserving EDS file to the memory card or USB memory by operating the CNC
screen.
Implicit message and Explicit message
In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and
another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and
the latter is called "Explicit message".
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 4/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

362. In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the
connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure.
CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be
used.
The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or
writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own
value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure.
CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used.
Originator and Target
At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the
connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as an originator of
connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection.
EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Class 1 originator.
Fixed / Variable data size
In the communication of EtherNet/IP, fixed/variable data size is specified in the connection request. In case of a
fixed size connection, always the specified size of data will be transferred. In case of a variable size connection,
the amount of data on each transmission may be a variable size, up to the size specified in the connection.
Normally, Implicit message uses fixed size transmission, and Explicit message uses variable size transmission.
Header format
In the class 1 communication, there are following four types of transmission data format; 32-bit header format,
modeless format, heartbeat format, and zero length data format. EtherNet/IP Scanner function calls each type as
Run/Idle, modeless, heartbeat, and zero length. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Run/Idle, modeless and
heartbeat format.
Type of header Description
Run/Idle 2 byte sequence count and 4 byte header are added to the top of data.
4 byte header contains Run/Idle notification.
Modeless 2 byte sequence count is added to the top of data.
Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred.
Heartbeat This type can be used when data size is zero. Only the 2 byte sequence count is
transferred. Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred.
Zero length This type can be used when data size is variable. The 2 byte sequence count is added to
the top of data. Run/Idle notification is transferred by transmission data size. When data
size is zero means Idle, and data size is one or more means Run.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 5/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

363. Client and Server
At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to
the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data.
RPI and API
In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval
that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called
API (Actual Packet Interval).
Type of communication
In Class1 communication, there are following four types of communication. EtherNet/IP Scanner function
supports Exclusive Owner, Input Only, and Listen Only.
Type of Description
Communication
Exclusive Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI data from the adapter to the scanner
is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to the same
area of adapter from multiple scanners.
Input Only Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged.
Listen Only Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other
Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established.
Redundant Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI signal from the adapter to the
scanner are exchanged. It differs from Exclusive Owner, Redundant Owner is allowed to
write the value to the same area of adapter from multiple scanners.
Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner
devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.
Production trigger
Production trigger specifies the data transmission timing of adapter. Usually, scanner uses a cyclic trigger, and
also can use same trigger of adapter. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports all of production trigger type of
adapter, but EtherNet/IP Scanner function only supports cyclic trigger of scanner.
Type of trigger Description
Cyclic Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.
Change of state Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.
In addition, data is transmitted immediately when the state of the equipment changes.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 6/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

364. Application Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.
In addition, it is also possible to transmit data according to the arbitrary timing.
Network composition of I/O transmission
Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission
interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting.
Multiple adapters are connected to one Multiple scanners are connected to one
scanner adapter
Scanner Scanner Scanner
Setting1 Setting2 Setting1 Setting1
DO DI DO DI DI DO DI DO
DI DO DI DO DO DI DO DI
Setting1 Setting1 Setting1 Setting2
Adapter Adapter Adapter
Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used.
If multicasting of DO is performed by all equipments when equipments support both adapter function and
scanner function, each equipment can read the signal of other equipments.
DO signal of the adapter is transmitted DO Multicasting by all of equipments
by multicast
Scanner Scanner
No.1 No.2 No.3
Setting1 Setting1
DI DI Adapter DO Scanner 1 DI Scanner 1 DI
Scanner 1 DI Adapter DO Scanner 2 DI
Scanner 2 DI Scanner 2 DI Adapter DO
DO
Setting1
Adapter
ONLINE and OFFLINE
There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE in EtherNet/IP Scanner function of CNC. If a power supply is
switched on, CNC start in the state of ONLINE. CNC communicates according to the preserved setting.
Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change a setup. All executed communications are terminated
when the state changes into OFFLINE. When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF
alarm state. When the changing of setup is completed, turn the CNC power off and back on again. CNC
becomes to ONLINE state and the changed setup becomes effective.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 7/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

365. G.1.3 CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION
In the option of CNC, EtherNet/IP Adapter function and EtherNet/IP Scanner function are provided. These
functions are independent each other, and these can be operated as three types; only adapter function, only
scanner function, and adapter + scanner function. When both the adapter function and the scanner function are
specified, it operates with the same hardware. The adapter function and the scanner function cannot be operated
with different hardware. The function of EtherNet/IP supported by each option is as follows.
CNC option Supported EtherNet/IP function
EtherNet/IP Adapter function - Class 1 target
- Class 3 server that reads and writes DI/DO signal
EtherNet/IP Scanner function - Class 1 originator
The adapter function is required to communicate with scanner equipment such as PLC or etc.
The adapter function is required to read or write DI/DO signal of CNC from the external machine by the explicit
message of the class 3.
The scanner function is required to connect the adapter equipment such as a remote I/O or an image sensor.
G.1.4 SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION
Specification of CNC
Item Description
Supported CNC type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B, Power Motion i -MODEL A
Supported hardware Following hardware is supported.
- Multi-function Ethernet
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type
Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B and Power Motion i -A (Connector name: CD38B)
- Fast Ethernet Board
Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)
Hardware that operates EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the Ethernet function is
specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER"
for details.
Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function.
- EtherNet/IP Scanner function (R966)
- Ethernet function (S707)
The EtherNet/IP functions operate with the same hardware as the Ethernet function. It
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 8/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

366. cannot operate with another hardware.
Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to EtherNet/IP functions. EtherNet/IP
functions and Data Server function cannot be specified at the same time.
EtherNet/IP functions and FL-net function (J692) cannot be operated with the same
hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP functions do not operate.
NOTE
When EtherNet/IP functions are used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be
connected to one CNC.
Specification of EtherNet/IP Scanner
Item Description
Communication type Class 1 originator
Data type of CNC PMC data (R, E and D area)
Maximum number of 32
communication setting
Maximum data size per 256 byte
allocation setting
Maximum number of 32
connection
Range of RPI 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms)
Bridge to DeviceNet Not supported
Redundant Owner Not supported
Fixed/Variable size Fixed size is supported. Variable size is not supported.
Transport type DI (T=>O)
Multicast and unicast (Point-to-Point) are supported. NULL is not supported.
DO (O=>T)
Unicast (Point-to-Point) is supported. Multicast and NULL are not supported.
Header format DI (T=>O)
Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported.
DO (O=>T)
Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported.
Priority DI (T=>O)
Scheduled, low, high, and urgent are supported.
DO (O=>T)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 9/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

367. Scheduled is supported. Low, high, and urgent are not supported.
Production trigger DI (T=>O)
Cyclic, change of state, and application are supported.
DO (O=>T)
Cyclic is supported. Change of state and application are not supported.
Specification of communication
Item Description
IP address Specified by either of the following methods.
- Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen.
- Acquires from DHCP server.
(It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the
DHCP server once.)
Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed)
Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed)
Ethernet interface Following settings are supported.
- 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
- Half duplex or Full duplex
- Auto Negotiation or Fixed
Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.
G.1.5 SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER
Maximum 32 communication settings can be specified in the scanner. One communication setting creates one
connection. The scanner can be set by the following two methods.
1. Setup on the CNC screen.
2. Use other company's scanner setting tool such as "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" of Rockwell Automation,
etc.
See "G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL" about details of the method of setting the
scanner by using RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP.
The flow of the operation to setup on the screen of CNC is as follows.
Operation Description
1 If the state is ONLINE, If the state is ONLINE, CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and the
change to OFFLINE. setting cannot be changed. Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change
a setting. All communications are terminated when the state changes into
OFFLINE.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 10/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

368. 2 Select the Select the communication setting for changing value from 32 communication
communication setting settings.
3 If the communication The setting which the communication state is "ENABLE" is effective to
state is "ENABLE", communicate, and the "DISABLE" setting is not effective to communicate.
change to "DISABLE". Change the communication state to "DISABLE" to change values.
4 Change value by the In the simple screen, set the item for which the setting is necessary.
simple screen.
5 Change value by the In the detail screen, more detailed setting can be done. In many cases, CNC can
detail screen if communicate equipments by only the simple screen setting.
necessary.
6 Change the When the setup is completed, change the communication state to "ENABLE".
communication state to CNC confirm settings when the communication state changes into "ENABLE".
"ENABLE".
7 Repeat from 2 to 7 To change plural settings, operate these repeatedly.
operations if necessary.
8 Turn the CNC power off CNC becomes to ONLINE state and CNC start to communicating with new
and on. settings.
G.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN
Unit of the data and concurrency
The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long
(4 byte).
The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.
Unit of data Restriction of PMC address Restriction of size
Byte (1 byte) N.A. N.A.
Word (2 byte) Aligned with 2-byte boundaries Aligned with 2-byte boundaries
(Even address only) (Even size only)
Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries Aligned with 4-byte boundaries
(Value can be fourthly divided only) (Value can be fourthly divided only)
The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit.
Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 11/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

369. Conversion of endian
Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the
data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian.
Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method.
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted.
Ethernet line PMC area
0 15 7 0
+00 +00
12h 34h 34h
+01 56h 78h +01 12h
+02 78h
+03 56h
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted.
Ethernet line PMC area
0 15 7 0
+00 +00
12h 34h 12h
+01 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted.
PMC area
Ethernet line 7 0
0 31
+00
+00
78h
12h 34h 56h 78h +01 56h
+02 34h
+03 12h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted.
PMC area
Ethernet line 7 0
0 31 +00
12h
+00
12h 34h 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 12/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

370. G.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE
This section explains the setting and the maintenance of EtherNet/IP Scanner function.
To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP
Scanner function.
G.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS
There are two methods of setting IP address.
1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.
2. Acquires a value from DHCP server
Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.
Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.
Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON
screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this
manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT
NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.
Acquires a value from DHCP server
Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION" of this manual.
When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures.
1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server.
2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory.
When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the
setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer.
Please refer to item "Basic screen" of "G.2.3.1 Basic screen, List screen" for details.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 13/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

371. G.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT
The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Scanner function is shown on the title bar of each screen.
Title Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type
[MULTI-FUNC ETHER]
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A
[BOARD(SLOT1)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 1
[BOARD(SLOT2)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 2
[BOARD(SLOT3)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 3
[BOARD(SLOT4)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
G.2.3 EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN
This section explains setting screens for the operation of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Setting screens consists
of the following screens.
Basic screen 1/2
List screen 2/2 Simple screen 1/2, 2/2 Detail screen 1/4 - 4/4
Consist of setting screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 14/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

372. In the basic screen, basic settings of EtherNet/IP Scanner function can be set.
The list screen shows communication setting list, and it is possible to move to the simple screen by selecting the
communication setting to which the value should be changed.
In the simple screen, settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set.
In the detail screen, detail settings can be set, if necessary.
NOTE
1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen, set the
MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation
level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.
G.2.3.1 Basic screen, List screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Basic screen on the 1st page is displayed. Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter
the parameters.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 15/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

373. Basic screen
1st page is basic screen. A common setting in EtherNet/IP Scanner function is done.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Basic)
Operation
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
[(OPRT)] :
[OFFLINE] :
[DI DATA] :
Setting item
Item Description
There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE.
ONLINE : CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and settings cannot be
changed.
NETWORK
OFFLINE : All communications of EtherNet/IP Scanner function are terminated.
Initial value : ONLINE
Settings can be changed.
If a power supply is switched on, CNC will start with ONLINE. Change the NETWORK from
ONLINE to OFFLINE by screen operation to change a setup. Turn the CNC power off and
back on again to change the NETWORK from OFFLINE to ONLINE.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 16/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

374. Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [OFFLINE], and then select
[EXECUTE].
Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops.
HOLD : DI area is held when DI area isn't updated by communication error of adapter.
DI DATA ON (Nothing is done).
ABNORMAL CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero when DI area isn't updated by communication
Initial value : HOLD error of adapter.
Soft key is used to change the setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select
[HOLD] or [CLEAR].
Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Scanner
function is stored. Please refer to the "STATUS", described later, for details of status.
STATUS ADDRESS When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is
Initial value : --- displayed in STATUS SIZE.
The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS
SIZE too.
STATUS SIZE Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to
Initial value : 0 PMC area is limited according to this size.
Range of value: When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is
0,1,4,7,10,13 displayed in STATUS SIZE.
Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address,
DNS IP address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP
client function (No.904#6).
Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are
0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM).
1 : saved in nonvolatile memory. When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically
set to 1.
Bit 1 : DHCP client function is
OPTION 1 0 : enabled.
Initial value : 00000000 1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.)
Bit 2 : When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, specify the
contents of output to the EDS file.
0 : Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner
function setting screen.
Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the adapter
function setting screen.
1 : Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner
function regardless of the output screen.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 17/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

375. Bit 3-4 : Reserved (Must be zero)
Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP functions are
0 : enabled.
1 : disabled.
When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the scanner maintenance
screen, the indicators of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all
items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL NO.
Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, initialization of the setting of
EtherNet/IP scanner is
OPTION 2
0 : not executed.
Initial value : 00000000
1 : executed.
Bit 1-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION
1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E
area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also
be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as
nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is
turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable
operation when the power is turned on next time.
2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used
for other purposes.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 18/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

376. NOTE
1 When a parameter except the "NETWORK" is changed, CNC becomes POWER
MUST BE OFF alarm state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the
CNC power off and back on again.
2 When the "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE, setting can be changed from other
setting screens.
3 The following items are shared with EtherNet/IP adapter and scanner functions.
When both the scanner function and adapter function are available, the changed
content is reflected to the other.
- DI DATA ON ABNORMAL
- OPTION 1
4 The communication of the scanner function stops when "NETWORK" is changed to
OFFLINE. When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available,
The communication of the adapter function doesn't stop when "NETWORK" is
changed to OFFLINE.
5 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a
PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first
path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Display item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.
Status
The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The 1st byte is status of the entire EtherNet/IP
Scanner function. The 2nd byte or later are the status of each communication. It uses 3 bytes for every 8
communication settings. Output amounts of the communication settings to PMC area are specified by the status
size.
Status size Description
0 Status is not output.
1 The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function is outputted.
4, 7, 10, 13 The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the status of 8, 16, 24, or 32
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 19/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

377. communication settings are outputted.
Status
+0 OPE - - - - - - ERR
+1 ENA08 ENA07 ENA06 ENA05 ENA04 ENA03 ENA02 ENA01
+2 CON08 CON07 CON06 CON05 CON04 CON03 CON02 CON01
+3 IN08 IN07 IN06 IN05 IN04 IN03 IN02 IN01
+4 ENA16 ENA15 ENA14 ENA13 ENA12 ENA11 ENA10 ENA09
Status address
--- ---
+9 IN24 IN23 IN22 IN21 IN20 IN19 IN18 IN17
+10 ENA32 ENA31 ENA30 ENA29 ENA28 ENA27 ENA26 ENA25
+11 CON32 CON31 CON30 CON29 CON28 CON27 CON26 CON25
+12 IN32 IN31 IN30 IN29 IN28 IN27 IN26 IN25
The figures of two digits of the end of signal name shows the number of the communication setting, and it is
shown as xx in the following tables.
Signal Name Description
ERR Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault)
OPE Operating correctly (MS : device operational)
ENAxx The state specified by communication setting xx is "ENABLE".
CONxx Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx.
Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx, and DI area is updated by received
INxx
data.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 20/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

378. List screen
2nd page is list screen. When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the
setting is displayed. The STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". And it is possible to move to a
simple screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)
Operation
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
[(OPRT)] :
[STATE] :
Select a setting and press soft key [(OPRT)], [SIMPLE SET], then it is possible to move to a simple screen.
Setting item
Item Description
There are "ENABLE", "DISABLE", and "ERROR" state.
ENABLE : This setting is enabled. CNC is communicating by the preserved setting.
STATE This setting cannot be changed.
Initial value : "DISABLE" DISABLE, ERROR : This setting is disabled and the communication is not executed.
This setting can be changed.
In this screen, STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". When the item STATE
is changed to "ENABLE", the setting is confirmed. If there is not a problem, item STATE
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 21/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

379. keeps "ENABLE". If there is a problem, item STATE change to "ERROR".
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE]
or [DISABLE].
Display item
Item Description
Displays the state of each communication setting. This value corresponds to the "STATE"
in setting item.
LIST O : Enable
- : Disable
E : Error
SETTING NO. Number of the communication setting specified with the cursor.
IP ADDRESS IP address of the communication setting specified with the cursor.
Address, size, and RPI of the communication setting specified with the cursor.
ADDRESS, SIZE, RPI
Each of DI (T=>O) and DO (O=>T) value is displayed.
Data length per second, which communicates with an adapter of the communication setting
specified with the cursor.
DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC
Both DI and DO length are counted. Setting unit is [byte / second]. If STATE is not
"ENABLE", this value is 0.
DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC Total values of "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC" of all communication settings.
(TOTAL) Setting unit is [byte / second].
G.2.3.2 Simple screen
Procedure
1 On the list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [SIMPLE]. The simple screen is displayed.
3 Press Page key to switch the page.
4 Input values to all setting items.
5 If necessary, move to detail screen to input values to detailed items.
6 To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 22/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

380. NOTE
If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be
displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the
"NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE.
Simple screen
Settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set.
1st page is a setting for the target that is the communication destination, and 2nd page is a setting for CNC that
is the originator.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Simple 1/2, 2/2)
Operation
In the 2nd page, press soft key [DATA UNIT] or [ENDIAN CHANGE] as needed, then press the following soft
key.
[DATA UNIT] :
[ENDIAN CHANGE] :
To return to the list screen, press soft key [SET LIST].
To move to the detail screen, press soft key [DETAIL SET].
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 23/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

381. Setting item
Item Description
Specify the IP address or the hostname of the adapter equipment of the communication
IP ADDRESS
destination.
Initial value : blank (SP)
To use a hostname, the DNS client function (No.904#5) is required.
ASSEMBLY INSTANCE
Specify the input assembly number, output assembly number, and configuration
Initial value : 0
assembly number of the adapter equipment assembly class.
Range of value:
When number is not used, set " " (blank).
0 to 65536
In "T=>O" or "O=>T", T means target (adapter) and O means originator (scanner)
or blank (SP)
SIZE
Initial value : 0 Specify the size (byte) of the area where input/output data is stored.
Range of value: 0 to 256
Specify the interval of sending data (packet) in EtherNet/IP.
RPI
T=>O means sending interval of Target (adapter).
Initial value : 32
O=>T means sending interval of Originator (scanner).
Range of value: 4 to 10000
Setting unit is 1ms.
Select the data unit from 1, 2, or 4 byte.
DATA UNIT
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DATA UNIT], and then select from
Initial value : 1 byte
[1-BYTE], [2-BYTE], or [4-BYTE].
Specify whether to convert endian.
DISABLE : Endian is not converted.
ENDIAN
ENABLE : Endian is converted.
Initial value : DISABLE
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [ENDIAN CHANGE], and then
select from [ENABLE] or [DISABLE].
TYPE Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored.
Initial value : 0 00 : UNUSED DI/DO data is not stored. If input/output data size is 0, set this value.
Range of value: 0 or 1 01 : PMC DI/DO data is stored to PMC area.
Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored.
When the item TYPE is "00:UNUSED ", the value cannot be set.
ADDRESS When the item TYPE is "01:PMC ", the start address of PMC area, R/D/E, can be set.
Initial value : --- The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC. It
is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC
area.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 24/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

382. CAUTION
1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E
area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also
be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as
nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is
turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable
operation when the power is turned on next time.
2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used
for other purposes.
NOTE
For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a
PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first
path (1:R0500).
If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
G.2.3.3 Detail screen
Procedure
1 On the simple screen, press soft key [DETAIL]. The detail screen is displayed.
2 Press Page key to switch the page.
3 Input values to setting items.
4 To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].
NOTE
If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be
displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the
"NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE.
Detail screen
Detail settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set.
1st page is a setting of data transfer for Target to Originator, and 2nd page is a setting of data transfer for
Originator to Target.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 25/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

383. EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 1/4, 2/4)
Operation
Press soft key [TRANSPORT], [HEADER FORMAT], or [PRIORITY] as needed, then press the following soft
key.
[TRANSPORT] :
[HEADER FORMAT] :
[PRIORITY] :
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 26/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

384. 3rd page is a setting of electronic key, and 4th page is a setting of whole communication.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 3/4, 3/4)
Operation
Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], [TIME OUT], or [PRODUCT TRIGER] as needed, then press the
following soft key.
[COMPATIBILITY] :
[TIME OUT] :
[PRODUCT TRIGER] :
To return to the simple screen, press soft key [SIMPLE SET].
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 27/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

385. Setting item
Item Description
Specify the data transport type between Target (adapter) and Originator (scanner), "1 to
multiple" or "1 to 1".
MULTICAST : 1 to multiple
TRANSPORT TYPE
UNICAST : 1 to 1 ("Point-to-Point")
Initial value : UNICAST
Only the T=>O transport type can be specified. The O=>T transport type is fixed as
"UNICAST".
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TRANSPORT TYPE], and then select from
[MULTICAST] or [UNICAST].
Specify the header format used by data transport.
RUN/IDLE : Use 32 bit Run/Idle flag
MODELESS : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is more than 1.
HEARTBEAT : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is 0.
If header format for "O=>T" has not been changed from initial value, this is changed
automatically by the SIZE value. It is changed to "RUN/IDLE" if SIZE value is 1 or more,
and is changed to "HEARTBEAT" if SIZE value is 0.
When the value is specified from the screen, the specified value is used after that.
HEADER FORMAT
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [HEADER FORMAT], and then select from
Initial value :
[RUN/IDLE], [MODELESS], or [HEARTBEAT].
T => O : MODELESS
O => T : HEARTBEAT
This setting is specified according to the adapter equipment, and the following
combinations are frequently used
Exclusive Owner
T => O: MODELESS
O => T: RUN/IDLE
Input Only or Listen Only
T => O: MODELESS
O => T: HEARTBEAT
Specify the priority of the data transmission of EtherNet/IP.
LOW: Data is transmitted by low priority.
HIGH: Data is transmitted by high priority.
PRIORITY SCHEDULED: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.
Initial value: SCHEDULED URGENT: Data is transmitted by urgent priority.
Only the T=>O priority of the data transmission can be specified. The O=>T priority is
fixed as "SCHEDULED".
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRIORITY], and then select from [LOW],
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 28/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

386. [HIGH], [SCHEDULE], or [URGENT].
If it is necessary to specify the adapter equipment to avoid communicating with the
adapter equipment not intended, input values to the following items from "VENDOR ID" to
"COMPATIBILITY".
ELECTRONIC KEY If it is not necessary to specify the adapter equipment, keep them to initialized value.
The adapter equipment verifies the ELECTRONIC KEY that received from scanner
equipment in the connection request and the own adapter information. If there is
difference, the connection request is refused.
VENDOR ID
Initial value : 0000H Specify the vendor ID of adapter equipment.
Range of value: Specify "0" if verification is not necessary.
0000H to FFFFH
DEVICE TYPE
Initial value : 0000H Specify the device type of adapter equipment.
Range of value: Specify "0" if verification is not necessary.
0000H to FFFFH
PRODUCT CODE
Initial value : 0000H Specify the product code of adapter equipment.
Range of value: Specify "0" if verification is not necessary.
0000H to FFFFH
REVISION Specify the revision of adapter equipment.
Initial value : 0.000 Format is the following.
Range of value : <Major number>.<Minor number>
0.0 to 127.255 Specify "0.0" if verification is not necessary.
Specify the presence of the compatibility of the specified Electronic key information
verification.
DISABLE (All of electronic key item has not been changed from initial value.):
Electronic key information is not sent to the adapter equipment. Therefore, it is
not verified.
DISABLE (Some of electronic key item had been changed.):
COMPATIBILITY
Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified
Initial value : DISABLE
without compatibility. It is possible to connect only when the value of all items
agree with the adapter equipment.
ENABLE:
Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified with
compatibility. It is possible to connect if the adapter equipment judges it is
compatible even if information of the electronic key is different.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 29/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

387. It is necessary to set a correct value to "VENDOR ID", "PRODUCT CODE", and
Major number of "REVISION".
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], and then select from
[ENABLE] or [DISABLE].
Specify the multiplier used to calculate of the timeout value for the sending/receiving of
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER the DI/DO data.
Initial value : x4 Timeout value = RPI value of DI (T=>O) * TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER
Range of value : When the timeout multiplier is [x4] and RPI is 10ms, if 40 ms pass from the last data
x4 to x512 reception and the following data is not received yet, it is judged to be a timeout.
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TIMEOUT], and then select from [x4] to [x512].
Specify the time until reconnection is demanded when the connection is closed by some
reasons. Setting unit is 1 second.
RECONNECT It is reconnected after waiting the time specified again when failing in reconnection.
Initial value : 0 ---:
Range of value : Reconnection is disabled. To specify this input " " (blank).
0 to 60, blank 0 to 60:
Demand reconnection when the specified time passes.
Initial value 0 means 10 seconds.
Specify the timing that the adapter equipment transmits data.
CYCLIC:
Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.
CHANGE STATE:
Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.
In addition, adapter equipment transmits data when state of the equipment
PRODUCTION TRIGGER changes.
Initial value: CYCLIC APPLICATION:
Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.
In addition, adapter equipment can transmit data according to the arbitrary
timing.
The timing that the scanner equipment transmits data is fixed as "CYCLIC".
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRODUCT TRIGGER], and then select from
[CYCLIC], [CHANGE STATE], and [APPLICATION].
OPTION1 Bit 0-7:
Initial value: 00000000 Reserved (Must be zero)
OPTION2 Bit 0-7:
Initial value: 00000000 Reserved (Must be zero)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 30/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

388. G.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING
This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function.
The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory.
When backing up and restoring the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function, the communication parameters of
the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press
the continue key.)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and
[ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear.
6 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
7 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key
[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed.
The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 31/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

389. BACKUP
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the
SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the
memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP
master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are saved
from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 32/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

390. ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP
master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are
read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that
parameter is not saved to the SRAM.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the
file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.
CAUTION
While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is
being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external
input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
NOTE
1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be
performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state.
2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that
requires power-off.
3 When the output level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than
that of the operation level, all backup/backup cannot be done, and warning
message "PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist,
all backup is possible. )
4 When the change level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than
the operation level, restore/all restore cannot be done, and warning message
"PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist, all restore
is possible. )
Related NC parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground
0020
input/output device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 33/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

391. G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE
This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory.
When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, the contents of output to the EDS file can
be specified by the OPTION 1 Bit 2 in the basic screen.
OPTION 1 Bit 2 value
The contents of output to the EDS file
in the basic screen
Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner function
setting screen. Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the
0 adapter function setting screen.
Standard EDS file name for the scanner function is "FSCNC101.EDS", and standard file
name for the adapter function is "F_CNC101.EDS".
Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner
1
function regardless of the output screen. Standard EDS file name is "FWCNC101.EDS".
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press
the continue key.)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears.
6 Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.
7 Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file.
If the file name is not specified, the standard file name is used.
The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 34/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

392. CAUTION
While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is
being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external
input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
NOTE
1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode.
2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is
allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.
Related NC parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground
0020
input/output device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 35/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

393. G.2.6 Initialize
In the list screen, the communication setting specified with the cursor can be initialized
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 Press page key to display 2nd page, list screen.
6 Press soft key [(OPRT)], press soft key [+] twice, then the soft key [INITIALIZE] for initialize appears.
7 Move the cursor to select the communication setting to be initialized.
8 Press soft key [INITIALIZE], soft key [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] are displayed.
9 Press soft key [EXECUTE] then selected communication setting is initialized.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 36/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

394. G.2.7 EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN
This section explains maintenance screens for EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Maintenance screens consist of the
following screens.
Scanner information 1/3
Maintenance information list 2/3 Detail information
Adapter information acquisition 3/3
Consist of maintenance screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function
In the scanner information screen, the scanner information can be confirmed.
The maintenance list screen shows information list of connected adapter, and it is possible to move to detail
information screen from this screen.
The adapter information acquisition screen can acquire the adapter information specified by IP address and can
show them.
G.2.7.1 Scanner information screen, Maintenance information list screen,
Adapter information acquisition screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft key [EIP S MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
5 The scanner information screen on the 1st page is displayed. Press Page key to switch the
page.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 37/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

395. Scanner information screen
1st page is the scanner information screen. The information about the scanner function of CNC such as MS or
NS LED display, Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on can be confirmed in this screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Scanner information)
Display item
Item Description
MS LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed.
NS LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed.
VENDOR ID Vendor ID of the scanner is displayed in hex.
DEVICE TYPE Device type of the scanner is displayed in hex.
PRODUCT CODE Product code of the scanner is displayed in hex.
REVISION Revision of the scanner is displayed. The format is "Major revision.Minor revision".
SERIAL NO. Serial number of the scanner is displayed in hex.
The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.
LED display of MS Meaning
Steady Off DISABLE FUNCTION
Flashing Green STANDBY
Steady Green DEVICE OPERATIONAL
Flashing Red RECOVERABLE FAULT
Steady Red UNRECOVERABLE FAULT
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 38/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

396. The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.
LED display of NS Meaning
Steady Off (MS is steady off too) ---
Steady Off NO IP ADDRESS
Flashing Green NO CONNECTIONS
Steady Green CONNECTED
Flashing Red CONNECTION TIMEOUT
Steady Red DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS
Maintenance information list screen
Page 2 is a maintenance information list screen. Each communication setting state is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Maintenance information list)
Operation
When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the setting is displayed.
Press soft key [DETAIL], it is possible to move to the detail information screen about selected communication
setting.
Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire
the adapter information.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 39/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

397. Display item
Item Description
Each communication setting state is displayed.
MAINTENANCE O : I/O is communicating.
LIST E : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating.
- : Communication setting status is disabled.
SETTING NO. Communication setting number.
IP address of the communication setting. If the hostname is specified in the simple setting screen,
IP ADDRESS
the converted IP address will be displayed.
The status of the communication setting. It corresponds to the symbol of the "LIST" shown by "( )".
COM OK (O) : I/O is communicating
STATUS
COM ERROR (E) : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating.
DISABLE (-) : Communication setting status is disabled.
ERR GEN Display error code that shows the cause when STATUS is a "COM ERROR".
"ERR GEN" means the general error code and "ERR EXT" means the extended error code.
ERR EXT Error code value is determined by the EtherNet/IP specification. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE
OF EtherNet/IP" about these error codes and meaning.
The time connected with equipment is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS. The maximum value is
TIME
999:59:59.
Adapter information acquisition screen
Page 3 is the adapter information acquisition screen. Communicate with the adapter equipment of specified IP
address, and display acquired information.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Adapter information acquisition)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 40/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

398. Operation
1 Specify a value to "IP ADDRESS" and press [GET INFO].
2 This screen communicates with the adapter equipment of specified IP address, and display acquired
information.
NOTE
Depending on circumstances of some adapter equipment, the transmission of the
I/O data might stop when information acquisition is executed from this screen while
transmitting the I/O data.
Use information acquisition of this screen only for confirming communication target
in case of network setting.
Do not use information acquisition of this screen when system operation is actually
begun, and when the I/O data is transmitted.
Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address or host name of the adapter equipment to acquire information.
Display item
Item Description
PRODUCT NAME Acquired product name is displayed. "GET INFO ERROR" is displayed when acquisition fails.
VENDOR ID Acquired vendor ID is displayed.
DEVICE TYPE Acquired device type is displayed.
PRODUCT CODE Acquired product code is displayed.
REVISION Acquired revision is displayed.
SERIAL NO. Acquired serial number is displayed.
G.2.7.2 Detail information screen
Procedure
1 On the maintenance list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL], detail information screen is displayed.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 41/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

399. EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Detail information)
Operation
Press soft key [LIST] to return to the maintenance list screen.
Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire
the adapter information.
Display item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS IP address of the selected communication setting is displayed.
STATUS
ERR GEN
These are same as items in the maintenance information list screen.
ERR EXT
TIME
RPI (ms) The value of RPI set in the simple screen is displayed. Setting unit is 1ms.
It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP Scanner function actually
API (ms) processed.
O=>T means DO data receive interval, and T=>O means DI data send interval. Setting unit is 1ms.
It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally received.
RECV
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the Scanner function.
LOST
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
SEND It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally sent.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 42/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

400. The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
G.2.8 EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN
The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter and Scanner function.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the
continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHERNET/IP], and then the information related to EtherNet/IP functions is displayed.
EtherNet/IP functions log screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence
date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format "MMM.DD hh:mm:ss",
where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss
represents second.
To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 43/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

401. NOTE
The log information of EtherNet/IP functions is stored in volatile memory and it is
lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error
occurs.
The following lists major log message:
In the "A/S", "A" means log of the Adapter function, and "S" means log of the Scanner function.
XX means a general error code, and YY means an extended error code. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF
EtherNet/IP" for the detail of these error codes.
Error Code Log message A/S Meaning and action to be taken
E-1107 EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function A It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and the
cannot be used at the same time S FL-net function are operated with the same
hardware. Please confirm the value of parameter
No.970, 971, and 972.
E-1109 All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are A The connection request sent from the scanner was
busy [General=XXH:Extended=YYH] refused because the connection number exceed
maximum number(32).
All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are S The scanner sent connection request to the
busy adapter, but it was refused because all connection
[General=XXH:Extended=YYH:Scanner] of the adapter had already been used.
E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner A The unacceptable connection request was received
is refused from the scanner.
E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner A The unacceptable connection request was received
is refused (RPI Error) from the scanner.
RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the limits
of value (4-10,000ms) that can be accepted.
E-110C Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner A The unacceptable connection request was received
is refused (DI/DO Size Error) from the scanner.
The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner is
different from the size specified by the allocation
setting.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 44/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

402. Error Code Log message A/S Meaning and action to be taken
E-110D Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner A The unacceptable connection request was received
is refused (Assembly Instance Error) from the scanner.
The instance of the Assembly object specified from
the scanner is not in the adapter function. The
instance of the Assembly object is created if the
allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm
whether the allocation setting is enabled.
E-110E [Connection has timed out. (Adapter:UU)] A The allocation setting number UU has timed out.
[Connection has timed out. (Scanner:VV)] S The communication setting number VV has timed
out.
E-110F [Connection has closed. (Adapter:UU)] A The allocation setting number UU has closed.
[Connection has closed. (Scanner:VV)] S The communication setting number VV has closed.
E-1151 Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter was not S The connection request was sent to the adapter, but
received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH] the response from the adapter was not received.
Confirm whether the adapter power supply is on, or
whether the adapter is correctly connected to the
network.
E-1152 Error Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter S The error response was received from the adapter.
was received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
E-1153 Connect Request is refused S The connection request from the scanner was
[General=XXH:Extended=YYH] refused by the adapter.
E-1154 Connect Request is refused (DI/DO Size S The connection request from the scanner was
Error) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH] refused by the adapter. The size of DI/DO specified
by the scanner is different from the adapter.
E-1155 Connect Request is refused (RPI Error) S The connection request from the scanner was
[General=XXH:Extended=YYH] refused by the adapter. RPI specified by the
scanner cannot be accepted with the adapter.
E-1156 Connect Request is refused (ElectronicKey S The connection request from the scanner was
Mismatch) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH] refused by the adapter. The electronic key specified
by the scanner is different from the adapter.
E-1157 Connect Request is refused (Assembly S The connection request from the scanner was
Instance Error) refused by the adapter. The assembly instance
[General=XXH:Extended=YYH] specified by the scanner cannot be used in the
adapter.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 45/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

403. G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER
NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP functions is as follows.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
904 DHC DNS
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 DNS : The DNS client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#6 DHC : The DHCP client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
907 100 FUL FIX
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 FIX : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function
is running, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is
0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.)
1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.)
#1 FUL : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function
is running, the communication of Ethernet is
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 46/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

404. 0 : Half-duplex.
1 : Full-duplex
This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
#2 100 : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function
is running, the transmission rate of Ethernet is
0 : 10Mbps
1 : 100Mbps
This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function
0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function
0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] -1 to 6
Hardware that operates each function is selected.
Value Hardware
-1 Not used
0 Unsetting
1 Multi-function Ethernet
2 (reserved)
3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1
4 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2
5 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3
6 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 47/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

405. NOTE
1. When EtherNet/IP functions are available, these functions operate together with
Ethernet function on the same hardware that is specified by parameter No.970.
2. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used with Data server function. Only Data server
function can be used when both EtherNet/IP functions and Data server function
option are specified.
3. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used on the same hardware as the FL-net
function. Therefore, if FL-net function is used with EtherNet/IP functions, parameter
No.970 and No.971, or No.970 and No.972 cannot be set to the same value.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 48/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

406. G.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION
It should be set that the load of the communication becomes within the range of the ability of equipment for
stable EtherNet/IP communication. This chapter explains guidance for using EtherNet/IP functions under
suitable load.
G.4.1 RPI AND API
RPI (Requested Packet Interval) is the interval of sending data in EtherNet/IP functions, and API (Actual Packet
Interval) is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP functions actually processed.
These values are confirmed in the detail screen of the scanner maintenance screen or in the scanner detail screen
of the adapter maintenance screen.
EtherNet/IP scanner maintenance screen (Detail) EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen (Scanner detail)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 49/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

407. Direction Mean of RPI and API Judgment of value
Scanner T => O RPI : Specified value of the data-sending The processing of adapter (destination
maintenance interval for adapter. equipment) is:
screen API : Interval when scanner received the data RPI=API : In time
from adapter. RPI<API : Not in time
O => T RPI : Specified value of the data-sending The processing of scanner (CNC) is:
interval for scanner. RPI=API : In time
API : Interval when scanner sent data to RPI<API : Not in time
adapter.
Adapter O => T RPI : Specified value of the data-sending The processing of scanner (destination
maintenance interval for scanner. equipment) is:
screen API : Interval when adapter received the data RPI=API : In time
from scanner. RPI<API : Not in time
T => O RPI : Specified value of the data-sending The processing of adapter (CNC) is:
interval for adapter. RPI=API : In time
API : Interval when adapter sent data to RPI<API : Not in time
scanner.
Confirm that API and RPI of O => T is almost the same value when CNC is used as scanner. Confirm API and
RPI of T => O is almost the same value when CNC is used as adapter. There is a possibility that the processing
of CNC is not in time when the value of API is greatly different from RPI or the value of API changes
periodically and it doesn't stabilize. Change RPI to a bigger value to give a margin
There is another method to confirm the communication load; at first set a value that is smaller than the
necessary value to RPI, then confirm that API is not greatly different from RPI.
By this method, it can be confirmed whether there is still margin in processing when RPI is set to the necessary
value.
The minimum value of RPI is 4ms. A value that is smaller than this cannot be set.
NOTE
In CNC, EtherNet/IP functions are executed with high priority than other Ethernet
function like FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC screen display function. Therefore,
when EtherNet/IP functions are used together with other Ethernet functions, it is
necessary to give a margin enough for processing of EtherNet/IP functions.
Otherwise, time to process other Ethernet functions cannot be assigned, and there
is a possibility that these functions cannot be executed correctly.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 50/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

408. G.4.2 RPI AND DATA SIZE
In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per
second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. This data length per second can be used as a
guidance of a setup.
The adapter function and the scanner function are running on the same resources (hardware or software). If the
adapter function and the scanner function are used at the same time, total of data length per second is sum of
these values.
Total of data length per second (byte) =
Scanner function total of data length per second +
Adapter function total of data length per second
The data length per second of scanner function is displayed to a screen. See "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC
(TOTAL)" in the list of scanner setting screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 51/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

409. The data length per second of adapter function can be calculated by RPI value specified by scanner.
The adapter function supports maximum four allocation settings. The total of data length per second is obtained
by totaling these values.
Total of data length of the adapter function per second (byte) =
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.1 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.2 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.2 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.3 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.3 (ms)
1000
( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * )
RPI of Allocation setting No.4 (ms)
NOTE
Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.
The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP functions of CNC can operate is
about 128,000 bytes. Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range.
In addition, if CNC communicates with two or more equipments, set the larger value than the value of "Number
of connected equipment * 2 [ms]" to the RPI. If the number of connected equipment is five, set the larger value
than 10ms to RPI. The minimum value of RPI is 4ms.
NOTE
The above-mentioned maximum value of the total of data length per second is
guidance. This is not guarantee of the performance. When EtherNet/IP functions
are used together with other Ethernet functions like "FOCAS2/Ethernet function" or
"CNC screen display function", it is necessary to give a margin enough.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 52/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

410. The example of calculating total of data length per second of the adapter is shown as follows.
Example 1)
CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and
RPI=4ms.
Adapter
CNC Scanner
DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms
Allocation setting No.1 PLC
DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms
Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes)
Example 2)
CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3.
- PLC 1 : DI = 64 bytes, DO = 64 bytes, RPI = 8 ms
- PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, RPI = 20 ms
- PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes, DO = 256 bytes, RPI = 20 ms
Adapter
CNC Scanner
DO=64 bytes, RPI=8ms
Allocation setting No.1 PLC 1
DI=64 bytes, RPI=8ms
DO=128 bytes, RPI=20ms
Allocation setting No.2 PLC 2
DI=128 bytes, RPI=20ms
DO=256 bytes, RPI=20ms
Allocation setting No.3 PLC 3
DI=256 bytes, RPI=20ms
Total of data length per second
= ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 8) + ((128 + 128) * 1000 / 20) + ((256 + 256) * 1000 / 20))
= 54,400 (bytes)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 53/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

411. G.4.3 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME
This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner when CNC is used for both adapter
and scanner.
The input/output response time seen from the scanner is the total time of the following sequence; output signal
is set by the ladder program in the scanner, the signal value is notified to the adapter, processed by the ladder
program in the adapter, and input signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner again.
In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression.
Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3
CNC (Scanner)
Tin1
PMC EtherNet/IP
Data Scanner
area function
Tout3
Ladder
Program
Tout2 Tin2
CNC (Adapter)
Tout1
PMC EtherNet/IP
Data Adapter
Tin-out area function
Tin3
Ladder
Program
Scanner output data reading time (Tin1)
It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner function
receives the value of the signal in the scanner.
When RPI of O => T is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is
fixed value of 32ms.
Scanner output processing time (Tin2)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter
function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP Scanner function transmits the signal to the
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 54/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

412. network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can
be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
Adapter input data writing time (Tin3)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until
adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area
immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.
Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out)
The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder
program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.
Adapter output data reading time (Tout1)
It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until
EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC.
When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value
of 32ms.
Adapter output processing time (Tout2)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner
function receives it.
The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet
transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the
maximum value is API(RPI).
Scanner input data writing time (Tout3)
It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data
to the ladder program. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be
estimated to be almost zero.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 55/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

413. NOTE
1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until
the data is sent to the network is as follows.
- Scanner function : Tin1+Tin2
- Adapter function : Tout1+Tout2
In both cases, the maxima is as follows.
- When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms)
- When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms)
2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the
value of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the
Explicit message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each
32ms. When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately
reflected in the PMC data area.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 56/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

414. G.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM
The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that
uses EtherNet/IP functions.
CAUTION
The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may
vary depending on the connected device status and other factors.
If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the
time or status, but actual communication data.
Input and output signals
An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing
process of EtherNet/IP functions reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal also flows
a similar route in the opposite direction. Though the following figures describe the adapter function, it is similar
to the scanner function.
CNC
ＣＮＣ
PMC Input signal Output signal
リフレッシュ
Reading/writing EtherNet/IP
Process
処理 Adapter
DeviceNet
Ladder program
ラダープログラム マスタ機能
function
Process
処理
PMC Scanner
レジスタ
data
（メモリ）
area
Ethernet
Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions
Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions operate
asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of
reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at
high-speed.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 57/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

415. The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the ladder
program.
mth (m+1)th (m+2)th
Ladder program process
１ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
Content of data area A: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Content of data area B: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP : １，１ ２，１ ２，２ ３，３
１ １ ２ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
nth (n+1)th (n+2)th (n+3)th
Transferred to scanner
Time chart
The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and
writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program.
The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in
the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder
program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time.
The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is cyclically made to read data in
data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for example, in
the case of (n+1) Th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be read as one
set.
Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one
execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 58/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

416. CAUTION
Reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is made asynchronously with
the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind when
creating a ladder program.
1. When an input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is
read from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be
executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read.
2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the
specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device
before the ladder program is completely executed.
Concurrency of data
When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and
word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.
CAUTION
If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word
data is not guaranteed.
Concurrency of long data (4-byte data)
To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions.
1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes.
Commands:
MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED,
DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED,
RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD,
RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD,
FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD,
MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD
2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16
3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the
data unit of four bytes is specified.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 59/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

417. Concurrency of word data (2-byte data)
To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions.
1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes.
Commands:
MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW,
DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW,
LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW,
SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB,
DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW,
SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW
2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter
function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8
3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the
data unit of two bytes is specified.
Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data)
There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 60/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

418. G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION
This chapter describes the example of connecting the EtherNet/IP adapter and the EtherNet/IP scanner by Series
30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A.
G.6.1 EXAMPLE (1)
This section describes the parameter settings to connect one EtherNet/IP scanner and two EtherNet/IP adapters.
Equipment #2
Setting 01 Setting 02
DI DO DI DO
Scan Scan Scan Scan
Equipment #1 Equipment #3
DO DI DO DI
Adpt Adpt Adpt Adpt
Allocation 01 Allocation 01
Example of connection EtherNet/IP (1)
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 61/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

419. G.6.1.1 The image of data exchange
In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and
equipment #2 is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two
equipments.
Setting #1 Setting #2 Setting #3
Adapter Scanner Adapter
192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103
1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status
1:R0003 1:R0003
1:R0004 Scan: Status
1:R0008
1:R0100 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01
1:R0164 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01 1:R0164 Scan: DO Setting 01
1:R0228 1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01
1:R0292 Scan: DO Setting 02 1:R0292 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01
1:R0356
G.6.1.2 Parameter setting example
Parameters for the equipment #1
Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000
STATUS SIZE 3
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE
DI TYPE 01
DI ADDRESS 1:R0164
DI SIZE 64
DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0100
DO SIZE 64
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 62/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

420. OPTION 00000000
Parameters for the equipment #3
Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000
STATUS SIZE 3
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE
DI TYPE 01
DI ADDRESS 1:R0292
DI SIZE 64
DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0228
DO SIZE 64
OPTION 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
Parameters for the equipment #2
Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004
STATUS SIZE 4
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 02 ENABLE
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.101 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.103
T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101
T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64
T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 151 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 151
O => T SIZE 64 O => T SIZE 64
O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4
CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 63/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

421. DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE
ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE
DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01
DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0228
DO (O => T) TYPE 01 DO (O => T) TYPE 01
DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0164 DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0292
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS
T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE
O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED
ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE 0000H
TYPE
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H
CODE CODE
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000
ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE
COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4
RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0
PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC
OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000
OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 64/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

422. G.6.2 EXAMPLE (2)
This section describes the parameter settings to connect two EtherNet/IP scanners and one EtherNet/IP adapter.
Equipment #2
Allocation Allocation
01 02
DI DO DI DO
Adpt Adpt Adpt Adpt
Equipment #1 Equipment #3
DO DI DO DI
Scan Scan Scan Scan
Setting 01 Setting 01
Example of connection EtherNet/IP (2)
G.6.2.1 The image of data exchange
In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and #2
is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two equipments.
Setting #1 Setting #2 Setting #3
Scanner Adapter Scanner
192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103
1:R0000 Adpt: Status
1:R0003
1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status
1:R0008 1:R0008
1:R0100 Scan: DO Setting 01 1:R0100 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01
1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0164 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01
1:R0228 1:R0228 Adpt: DI Alloc. 02 1:R0228 Scan: DO Setting 01
1:R0292 Adpt: DO Alloc. 02 1:R0292 Scan: DI Setting 01
1:R0356
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 65/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

423. G.6.2.2 Parameter setting example
Parameters for the equipment #1 Parameters for the equipment #3
Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004 STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004
STATUS SIZE 4 STATUS SIZE 4
OPTION 1 00000000 OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000 OPTION 2 00000000
SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 01 ENABLE
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.102 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.102
T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 102
T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64
T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 151 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 152
O => T SIZE 64 O => T SIZE 64
O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4
CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100
DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE
ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE
DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01
DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0164 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0292
DO (O => T) TYPE 01 DO (O => T) TYPE 01
DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0228
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS
T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE
O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED
ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H
TYPE TYPE
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H
CODE CODE
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 66/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

424. ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000
ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE
COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4
RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0
PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC
OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000
OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
Parameters for the equipment #2
Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000
STATUS SIZE 3
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE ALLOCATION 02 ENABLE
DI TYPE 01 DI TYPE 01
DI ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI ADDRESS 1:R0228
DI SIZE 64 DI SIZE 64
DO TYPE 01 DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0164 DO ADDRESS 1:R0292
DO SIZE 64 DO SIZE 64
OPTION 00000000 OPTION 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 67/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

425. G.6.3 EXAMPLE (3)
This section describes the parameter settings to send own DO data to the other equipments.
Equipment #2
Setting Alloc. Setting
01 01 02
DI DO DI
Scan Adpt Scan
Equipment #1 Equipment #3
Setting DI DO DO DI Setting
01 Scan Adpt Adpt Scan 01
Alloc. 01 Alloc. 01
Setting DI DI Setting
02 Scan Scan 02
Example of connection EtherNet/IP (3)
G.6.3.1 The image of data exchange
In the above-mentioned three equipments, all equipments are running as both EtherNet/IP scanner and
EtherNet/IP adapter, and DO data are transmitted by the multicast. Therefore, all equipments can read DO data
of other equipments.
Setting #1 Setting #2 Setting #3
Scanner + Adapter Scanner + Adapter Scanner + Adapter
192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103
1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status
1:R0003 1:R0003 1:R0003
1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status
1:R0008 1:R0008 1:R0008
1:R0100 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01
1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0164 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 02
1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01
1:R0292 1:R0292 1:R0292
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 68/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

426. G.6.3.2 Parameter setting example
Parameters for the equipment #1
Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000 DI TYPE 00
STATUS SIZE 3 DI ADDRESS ---
OPTION 1 00000000 DI SIZE 0
OPTION 2 00000000 DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0100
DO SIZE 64
DI TYPE 00000000
Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004
STATUS SIZE 4
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 02 ENABLE
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.102 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.103
T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101
T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64
T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254
O => T SIZE 0 O => T SIZE 0
O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4
CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100
DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE
ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE
DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01
DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0164 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0228
DO (O => T) TYPE 00 DO (O => T) TYPE 00
DO (O => T) ADDRESS --- DO (O => T) ADDRESS ---
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 69/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

427. T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS
T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT
O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED
ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H
TYPE TYPE
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H
CODE CODE
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000
ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE
COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4
RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0
PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC
OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000
OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
Parameters for the equipment #2
Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000 DI TYPE 00
STATUS SIZE 3 DI ADDRESS ---
OPTION 1 00000000 DI SIZE 0
OPTION 2 00000000 DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0164
DO SIZE 64
OPTION 00000000
Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004
STATUS SIZE 4
OPTION 1 00000000
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 70/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

428. OPTION 2 00000000
SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 02 ENABLE
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.101 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.103
T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101
T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64
T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254
O => T SIZE 0 O => T SIZE 0
O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4
CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100
DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE
ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE
DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01
DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0228
DO (O => T) TYPE 00 DO (O => T) TYPE 00
DO (O => T) ADDRESS --- DO (O => T) ADDRESS ---
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST
T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS
T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT
O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED
ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H
TYPE TYPE
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H
CODE CODE
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000
ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE
COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4
RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0
PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC
OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000
OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 71/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

429. Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
Parameters for the equipment #3
Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000 DI TYPE 00
STATUS SIZE 3 DI ADDRESS ---
OPTION 1 00000000 DI SIZE 0
OPTION 2 00000000 DO TYPE 01
DO ADDRESS 1:R0228
DO SIZE 64
OPTION 00000000
Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD
STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004
STATUS SIZE 4
OPTION 1 00000000
OPTION 2 00000000
SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 02 ENABLE
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.101 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.102
T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101
T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64
T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 254
O => T SIZE 0 O => T SIZE 0
O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4
CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100
DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE
ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE
DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01
DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0164
DO (O => T) TYPE 00 DO (O => T) TYPE 00
DO (O => T) ADDRESS --- DO (O => T) ADDRESS ---
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 72/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

430. T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS
T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST
O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT
O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED
ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE 0000H
TYPE TYPE
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT 0000H
CODE CODE
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000
ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY DISABLE
COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4
RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0
PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC
OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000
OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 73/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

431. G.7 ATTACHED MATERIAL
G.7.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE
Supported class and instance are as follows. The line where item "A" is checked is a class supported by the
adapter function, and where item "S" is checked is a class supported by the scanner function.
Name A S Class code Instance number
Identity 01h 01h
Message Router 02h 01h
Assembly 04h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh
Connection Manager 06h 01h
Connection Configuration F3h 01h
Port F4h 01h
TCP/IP F5h 01h
Ethernet Link F6h 01h
The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object in the adapter
function is as follows.
Number of Output Assembly (T->O) Input Assembly (O->T)
allocation Exclusive Owner,
setting Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only
Input Only, Listen Only
1 65h (101) 97h (151)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
2 66h (102) 98h (152)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte FEh (254) FFh (255)
3 67h (103) 99h (153) Size : 0 byte Size : 0 byte
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
4 68h (104) 9Ah (154)
Size : 1 to 256 byte Size : 1 to 256 byte
Number of
allocation Configuration Assembly
setting
1
2 64h (100)
3 Size : 0 byte
4
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 74/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

432. G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP
The meaning of error code of EtherNet/IP displayed on the maintenance screen or the log screen is as follows.
ERR GEN ERR EXT
Detected By Description
(Hex) (Hex)
01 0100 Adapter Connection is in use
01 0103 Adapter Transport class1 or specified trigger is not supported
01 0106 Adapter The Exclusive Owner connection has already existed
01 0107 Adapter Connection is requested to be closed, but it has already closed
01 0108 Adapter Specified transport type is not supported
01 0109 Adapter Specified DI or DO size is not accepted for to the adapter
01 0110 Adapter Specified assembly instance is not configured
01 0111 Adapter Specified RPI is not supported
Scanner
01 0113 Cannot create new connection any more
Adapter
Specified vender ID or the product code is different from the value in
01 0114 Adapter
the electronic key
01 0115 Adapter Specified device type is different from the value in the electronic key
01 0116 Adapter Specified revision is different from the value in the electronic key
01 0117 Adapter Specified DI or DO assembly instance is not supported
01 0118 Adapter Specified configuration application path is not supported
Connection request for Listen Only fails since there is no non-Listen
01 0119 Adapter
Only connection types currently open.
01 011A Adapter Cannot create new connection any more
The Adapter to Scanner RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit
01 011B Adapter
Time
Scanner
01 0203 Connection has timed out
Adapter
01 0204 Scanner Unconnected request such as a connection request has timed out
01 0205 Adapter Parameter for unconnected request is error
01 0206 Scanner Message for unconnected transmission is too large
Acknowledge for unconnected message was received but a data
01 0207 Scanner
response message was not received.
Scanner
01 0301 There is not enough buffer memory
Adapter
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 75/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

433. Scanner
01 0302 There is not enough network bandwidth for data
Adapter
Scanner
01 0303 There is no reception connection ID filter can be used
Adapter
Scanner
01 0304 It is not configured to send the schedule priority data.
Adapter
01 0311 Scanner Specified port is not available
01 0312 Scanner Specified link address is invalid
Scanner Specified segment type or segment value in the connection path is
01 0315
Adapter invalid
01 0316 Adapter Specified connection path in the connection close request is invalid
Scanner
01 0317 Schedule is not specified
Adapter
01 0318 Scanner Link address to self is invalid
01 0319 Adapter Secondary resource cannot be used
01 031A Adapter Rack connection has already been established
01 031B Adapter Module connection has already been established
Scanner
01 031C Miscellaneous error
Adapter
01 031D Adapter Redundant connection mismatch
In the sending side device, there is no available user configurable
01 031E Adapter
receiving side link reception resource anymore
In the sending side device, there is no user configurable receiving
01 031F Adapter
side link reception resource
01 0800 Scanner Network link is offline
01 0810 Adapter There is no target application data can be used.
01 0811 Scanner There is no originator application data can be used.
01 0812 Scanner Node address has changed since the network was scheduled
01 0813 Adapter It is not configured for off-subnet multicast
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 76/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

434. G.7.3 SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE
This chapter describes the contents of the EDS file of the adapter, and the method of setting them to a setup
screen of the scanner.
G.7.3.1 Structure of the EDS file
The EDS file is classified in the section. It is possible to set two or more fields in the one section.
The parameter is set to each field. ";" (semicolon) is placed at the end of the parameter.
It is possible to set two or more parameters in the one field. In that case, the separator "," is placed between
parameter and parameter.
It is a comment from character "$" to the end of line.
$Comment
[Section name 1]
Field name 1= Parameter;
Field name 2= Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3;
---
[Section name 2]
---
G.7.3.2 Section [Device]
The equipment information of the adapter is described in the section [Device]. Input this value to
"ELECTRONIC KEY" of the detail screen. However, if the confirmation of the adapter equipment is
unnecessary, there is no need to change the value of "ELECTRONIC KEY" from the initial value.
Setting item of the detail screen Field name in the EDS file
VENDOR ID VendCode
DEVICE TYPE ProdType
PRODUCT CODE ProdCode
REVISION MajRev
MinRev
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 77/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

435. Example)
[Device]
VendCode = 591;
ProdType = 12;
ProdCode = 101;
MajRev = 1;
MinRev = 3;
The setting value of the "ELECTRONIC KEY" is as follows in case of the above-mentioned EDS file.
Setting item of the detail screen Parameter
VENDOR ID 591(Dec) / 24F (Hex)
DEVICE TYPE 12(Dec) /C (Hex)
PRODUCT CODE 101(Dec) /65 (Hex)
REVISION 1.3
G.7.3.3 Section [Connection Manager]
The specification of the connection that can be created by Adapter equipment is described in the section
[Connection Manager].
If more than one field is specified, select the suitable field by referring the 13th parameter, "Connection name".
15 parameters specified in the field and the correspondences of input item of the scanner setting screen are as
follows.
Setting item in the Parameter in the Description Remarks
setting screen EDS file
(None) 1st parameter Bit 0 : Class 0 This is the communication class.
Bit 0-6 Bit 1 : Class 1 The scanner function supports only
Bit 2 : Class 2 class 1.
Bit 3 : Class 3
Bit 4 : Class 4
Bit 5 : Class 5
Bit 6 : Class 6
PRODUCTION 1st parameter Bit 16 : CYCLIC
TRIGGER Bit 16-18 Bit 17 : CHANGE STATE
Bit 18 : APPLICATION
(None) 1st parameter Bit 24 : Listen Only This is the communication type
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 78/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

436. Bit 24-27 Bit 25 : Input Only The scanner function doesn't support
Bit 26 : Exclusive Owner Redundant Owner.
Bit 27 : Redundant Owner
(None) 2nd parameter Bit 0 : O=>T fixed size This is the assembly data size, fixed
Bit 0-3 Bit 1 : O=>T variable size size or variable size.
Bit 2 : T=>O fixed size The scanner function supports only
Bit 3 : T=>O variable size fixed size.
O => T 2nd parameter 0 : MODELESS
HEADER FORMAT Bit 8-10 3 : HEARTBEAT
4 : RUN/IDLE
T => O 2nd parameter 0 : MODELESS
HEADER FORMAT Bit 12-14 3 : HEARTBEAT
4 : RUN/IDLE
O => T 2nd parameter Bit 16 : NULL The scanner function supports only
TRANSPORT TYPE Bit 16-19 Bit 17 : MULTICAST UNICAST.
Bit 18 : UNICAST
T => O 2nd parameter Bit 20 : NULL All of Transport type bit acceptable by
TRANSPORT TYPE Bit 20-23 Bit 21 : MULTICAST the Adapter can be specified in the EDS
Bit 22 : UNICAST file.
Specify the one Transport type from
them in the setting screen.
O => T 2nd parameter Bit 24 : LOW The scanner function supports only
PRIORITY Bit 24-27 Bit 25 : HIGH SCHEDULED.
Bit 26 : SCHEDULED
Bit 27 : URGENT
T => O 2nd parameter Bit 28 : LOW
PRIORITY Bit 28-31 Bit 29 : HIGH
Bit 30 : SCHEDULED
Bit 31 : URGENT
O => T 3rd parameter Numerical value If this parameter is PramN or is empty,
RPI (Unit:μsecond) specify the RPI value.
ParamN
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 79/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

437. O => T 4th parameter Numerical value If this parameter is "PramN" or is
SIZE (Unit:byte) empty, it means that the setting of input
ParamN size of the adapter equipment is
necessary.
At first, specify this parameter to the
adapter equipment, and then specify
the same value to the scanner
equipment.
(None) 5th parameter This is the format of O => T.
T => O 6th parameter Numerical If this parameter is PramN or is empty,
RPI value(Unit:μsecond) specify the RPI value.
ParamN
T => O 7th parameter Numerical If this parameter is "PramN" or is
SIZE value(Unit:μsecond) empty, it means that the setting of
ParamN output size of the adapter equipment is
necessary.
At first, specify this parameter to the
adapter equipment, and then specify
the same value to the scanner
equipment.
(None) 8th parameter This is the format of T => O.
(None) 9th parameter Configuration #1 size These parameters cannot be specified
(None) 10th parameter Configuration #1 format from setting screen
(None) 11th parameter Configuration #2 size If necessary, use the other companies
(None) 12th parameter Configuration #2 format setting tool.
(None) 13th parameter Connection name This is the connection name.
(None) 14th parameter Help string This is the help string for the connection
name.
O => T 15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the 1st
ASSEMBLY INSTANCE "2C".
T => O 15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the 2nd
ASSEMBLY INSTANCE "2C".
CONFIG 15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the "24".
ASSEMBLY INSTANCE
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 80/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

438. Example)
[Connection Manager]
Connection1 =
0x04010002,
0x44640405,
Param1, Param2, ,
Param3, Param4, ,
,,
,,
"class1 - exclusive owner",
"",
"20 04 24 64 2C 97 2C 65";
The setting value of scanner setting screens to communicate with the above-mentioned EDS file is as follows.
Setting item Screen Parameter
Transport trigger Detail setting 4/4 CYCLIC
O => T Header format Detail setting 2/4 RUN/IDLE
T => O Header format Detail setting 1/4 MODELESS
O => T Transport type Detail setting 2/4 UNICAST
T => O Transport type Detail setting 1/4 UNICAST
(Select from UNICAST or MULTICAST)
O => T Priority Detail setting 2/4 SCHEDULED (Fixed)
T => O Priority Detail setting 1/4 SCHEDULED
O => T RPI Simple setting 1/2 Specify the needed communication interval.
O => T Size Simple setting 1/2 Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment.
T => O RPI Simple setting 1/2 Specify the needed communication interval.
T => O Size Simple setting 1/2 Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment.
O => T Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 151 (Decimal)
T => O Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 101 (Decimal)
Configuration Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 100 (Decimal)
It is necessary to specify about CNC such as PMC address, etc. in the 2/2 page of the simple screen.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 81/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

439. G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL
G.7.4.1 Outline
The parameter of the scanner function can be set from the scanner setting screen of CNC, but it is possible to set
them from the "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" (hereinafter referred to as "RSNetWorx") that is personal
computer software released by Rockwell Automation company.
When the adapter needs a detailed setting concerning the configuration, it is not possible to set it from the
scanner setting screen. Use the RSNetWorx. A detailed setting concerning the configuration is necessary in the
following condition.
- In the "Configuration Manager" section for communication in EDS file of an adapter, 9th to 12th
parameters have some value.
If these parameters are empty, setup can be done by both scanner setting screen and RSNetWorx.
RSNetWorx operation in this manual was confirmed with revision 10.00.00(CPR 9 SR2).
The setting procedure by RSNetWorx is the following.
1. Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx.
2. Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC.
3. Setup PMC address in CNC.
NOTE
1. When both adapter CNC and scanner CNC are connected in the same network,
setting by RSNetWorx is not possible.
Refer to the "G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION", and setup by CNC scanner
setting screen.
2. If a setup is transmitted to CNC from RSNetWorx, a communication setup of CNC
will be overwritten sequentially from No. 1.
G.7.4.2 Operation
In this section, the setting procedure of scanner by RSNetWorx is described.
Refer to the Rockwell Automation manual about details of operation procedure of the Rockwell Automation's
software.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 82/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

440. Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx
1. Operate the RSLinx that is software for the personal computer released by Rockwell Automation company,
and set IP address of CNC to the AB_ETH driver. As a result, RSNetWorx can communicate with CNC.
Select "Communications", "Configure Drivers", from RSLinks menu. And select "Ethernet devices" from
"Driver Types", and then add the IP address of CNC.
RSLinx Driver setting screen
2. Run RSNetWorx.
3. Register EDS files for adapter equipment and for the CNC Scanner function.
Select "Tools", "EDS Wizard" from the menu of RSNetWork and register the EDS file according to the
instruction of the screen.
When an EDS file was registered, equipment is added to the tree on the left side of the screen.
NOTE
To register an EDS file for CNC, use the EDS file of the Scanner function. The EDS
file which include both Adapter function and Scanner function cannot be used.
Refer to the "G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE" for details of EDS file output.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 83/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

441. 4. Double-click CNC (Series 30i) from the tree at the left of RSNetWorx. When IP address is input and the
OK button is pushed, the icon (gray cube) is displayed at the right of the screen.
Display the icon of the adapter equipment that should be connected by the same procedure.
RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP
5. Right-click the icon of CNC (Series 30i), and select "Scanlist Configuration" from the pop-up menu.
The Scanlist Configuration screen is displayed. The line with green background color is a scanner, and the
line with white background color is an adapter.
Scanlist Configuration screen
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 84/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

442. 6. Double-click the line of the adapter that communicates with CNC of the scanner. The Connection
Properties screen is displayed.
Set the value if necessary. Push the OK button when the setting ends.
Select connection name
Specify RPI
Specify T => O size Do not use
Specify O => T size
7. Preserve the setting on the Scanlist Configuration screen, and end the screen.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 85/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

443. Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC
8. Change the "NETWORK" from ONLINE to OFFLINE on the basic screen of the Scanner setting of CNC.
9. Right click the icon of CNC on the screen of RSNetWorx, and select "Download To Device". Push the yes
button to the confirmation dialog box.
10. The setting that set by RSNetWorx is displayed as "C" in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC.
And the "STATE" is displayed as "CHANGING". These mean that setting is not available, because a
necessary item such as the PMC address etc. has not been set yet though some value had set by a setting
tool.
Setup PMC address in CNC.
11. Move the cursor to the setting of the communication of "C" on the list screen. Press soft key [(OPRT)],
[SIMPLE] to display the simple screen.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 86/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai

444. 12. Set an address of PMC area to the 2nd page of the simple screen.
13. Return to the list screen, and change the "STATE" of the communication setting to ENABLE. The "O" is
displayed in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC.
14. Turn the CNC power off and on again.
NOTE
When a detailed setting concerning the configuration set by RSNetWorx exists, if
the "STATE" of such setting is changed to ENABLE, it is displayed in the list screen
as "T". A detailed setting concerning the configuration is preserved in such setting.
A detailed setting concerning the configuration cannot be displayed to CNC screen,
and cannot be changed from CNC screen. To delete such a communication setting,
execute the initializing procedure. Even if the value of items displayed on CNC
screen is changed, a detailed setting concerning the configuration remain. Refer to
the "G.2.6 Initialize" about details of the procedure of initialization.
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B
Title FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw
No. B-64014EN/04-3
Edit Date Design Description Sheet 87/87
Date 2011.08.10 Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai